edhe shee A rertt hd f ibetedad 7298'S sata se -O OPE * “aye * it omnis Der bo Ht) bela we aa tee t) : era errr nrnre Petri bore ott TRA rire a . Perarirr a beer trerer nt: cobCw Glo rote] * ccaere im ended add > ON 4 et 9 e' Puree ir a te ie Perarerer thurs wert bm Yee Ty re ae 4 ae J 4 Pierrr een Tae cot ot held . hele Pett Adalat dwt ee Garh i) 4 , Hert 4 4 xi a9! woaner ow eee nr Poor tobe thie eke be a ath th Bd bale ohh 6 othr Woah, othe per ei tesgoas aed 4 ot. ] ants MOB Oh ot roe rt; then pete by : : “4 “ “hs bok ~ eh zt ety rere e Me 4 oe " eri poereetrer poet tbr oem (hie abe og featboner el earactte ; uv siiardtamany sialaarega oan 47 eA gh adel che Jet ed etintnnd dae emirnet cea : tas 4 cf cea tram se €) z v z of te egal ha ae if te “as thai pa he a ‘ 4] Pere ee ar " to 3 . “ehh gett spasm enboee gn rty eat ibe . ' bbe Aid ota delhi ad és he Cars athe bel Adet in vy : $ yi L shed f tae co coeetaey eee hee ¢ ih Ard phy Lt ehpys yd saagiisii4rit f Y : ee pores ‘ ry eS Pe lO ene) Pie eer a ' « ‘ ‘ ‘ ee 4 eto . TFS Pret ee) See badd 4OVtede bete “4 4 “ Z , a Cited alae a Whsdedieadae . Za Fp rhe} Core ets v i Lied inter dsath as dipeataenencnels ts Brent! endl la asa edoester eusgseia M peprne pe a eet Po rebate eb doe a tad if a oh AD bonrite , t - ie erarie & he : 7) ‘ . ? et thee . ofeaet ae ee ae nee ; ta. Aelbete sh tet Ad : py ay : #4 ’ erate r } sink »” Aidt ted TE . Vaediee eer a) both gd oh : , . Aa” ehh Pag « 4 i pies b 4s see anda ota batt rs eh : P ALPES y , 4 4 oF, sae oe is 9 saieiis Poh yatta) ‘ ‘ rs " “ ; K : Sead b 4 uy 4 ba Se | dies ea 1 4s 9 a Lnthage T : : are Sedaris Leteae tae Mitta: saan We edgy bate 4 site tqite ‘ it a5 ct 7 7 ‘ phat atl eG iit 34 Ove re ag yi dadidrdets at erat (4 4etleseeanl steis ted oa 2 et Malt’ 4 ; Aaa od aif aie Get 4 ri] B34 48> : : ’ 7 Maas t OF el 4 Area 5 a Henatee: ¢ oN be Bar bean Ld be A , 3 Ci aes Frees dovens ; ee dete te tral rg sazinel sé veh a 4 ij 1 , {len 9 42h OH aehett” detead q 3 = Hl eHTtey 4 altees Yet ye rf a9 an 4i' " ? xtait K ied rH Wehed je aabil anes eatet sips . $5 a eS y y q rq > r¢ * 7. 434 a itt hae. { yi anaia ; E ie pea ete © rrr Pre Were Ly tae 1% J . - pag tao a tS A ert st -gedegs be : ; a4 f $ eat Bats ; : be PF } « a7, - % Sephora that at oft thet ak ye eta Detee t vit debe eae ht peer Sea vdadeded Poe ran At hes poe < 9707 oF tases Pda cokhsign Aad oe Bana : votuteg Ao ilatal he Tie asy ited +t isd oe cies uj baiseare tea aa a Sebo ater of. Wate if \ eho rt % ed wd a ~ re tate Nowedt oy as by Sy ene LEW hee on Pree S “ ees Gey ay wy Nopet' ae reve vi we Chas ATER Sil Rola icrtatie a esl ep pea “oy E at eee ae i Fast wat ea etdent “peg AY ores tk i eh wt { es ree Anh nas ' jinn V0 weevpeess b deters i i shelve. atte . ; f ' “i}- ib tt f hig Badissad We iat ; : 4 i ay : ‘bei Rb, Chee a footed SopEACH i aon oe oe dev wear Od a weit ‘ Zio aD im bt age ' a) is ' *! wet be OF Ree UMaasesataatt ert Wak Ge Wie RL SON Sait nart abner ait moieties aoe Pat rie te SET SUY il Ma aun Fu aia " i +" nab) aan ae Wael eis ® oh Pe tribe YEG bu a F 7H) i why Cot ; ; Lau vide A) daa’ 44 ‘ » Nd mm RSL ; DL KS it Ved wmtidip 4 Roane san 1 ? : 340% f Wyre veg a ‘i N 1 ; “fh Grieda\t wd Fins Hits 4 ary Asawa Ae win by ee ek 4 aii eae ‘ “ot Bly hal “ yar ie) ‘ Giitive +4 s ay bea hea " isa ‘a4 ty Sie ” i ‘ C a ¢ ; 4 1! uae Pata tet Gd hog tanta : " wt ! t i ‘ Mehta ors ] whale ’ Peri rye Ban Kedeayy Lea. dak ob LAU ILL 1 bole hho yeh aq Perce OL wie ot Se Par ee hropae Lib Gort eid eg swe hs r ; sr 4 Vie yet erie tw Pa WRG ST Rieke . 4 ‘ SUS Pt kL Ob Qed iy LeU Shy pened a PEP OT Me PhS Alek Ph) Dead btwenetal ara * VTE swine t i ‘oo 5 i a ay Metre | 4 & fhe NV ; ef Vib U Leet Oe ee at ane A ’ ¢ ree i i} ev dedeny : we * “ae . ‘ SHEE ay é t hat Fare : 3 rors ee yay , ' wate Voows 4 Sdwitsh ee a) } wand Pnen WK Rs bt AY ate : veiw Voted a, re ¢ . Or oe " : t ‘ ‘ ace aerate tet re WAT ary oat . i . rr =e haeg APA byt i “4 a “e Mate dt ta ‘ } ae nett PALE ie. } rath ied ‘ Heder iw a CUTE Ore, el ee bes tee ‘4 ‘ al . MW Gebietes 4 ere a Ssatea wee s . 4 . tee 4 S408R THO MOTE S Bete rw) Aah - ‘ 4 ae jatirntigbigadgasdyaceracanee ‘ aeedrapnya tit Say Neate eich te trop inert se : terarsnas a tee ‘ ‘ ei ideaedy ’ “i Webbe are aay on CLA be Tite ue Oba bi SO ee wis . ee the OF oe aren ee: : ‘ . i “Wid dead EID M ett ee) <5 beget vasizord A yeasa ine ace bee " 4 , A bee at eee are @ Sewer SOS @ oe re oe wesels SAW AG ST Bares gtidar : et a ide be ae e i lord a newed pert “ a q Se A Goat de OT eee Oe Or ere Hee Sere ten Reever ere = 8 Sede Cad eek eed Me eR sew Col domed’ Var ‘ *15 ete ot ea x 3 ae et ene tere ar eer CR. CTH te OG RCO ROR SRA PE OLS en a “ VOUd Aloadet ee Crore Greater e & J » OA fis hale Sind Le eR AD) Det Oded ‘ Cee} Vwardiofoed) each ete eee a4 ‘ erin Were 7 oe Coat es A ee by ans hinted - : : we Vets ‘ Pe Wet) r ‘ . vo =$ 40 6 Ph ream OSE) oO) bee OhNew “aetna ' “Ae ‘ ; f e)es fe ted ee FOS ree apart G4 Se Re ' et Shy a a} Ly Ny : Ai teas : 4 * var « +4 tA del peat) wae ee Ahk WENT OTT PRET ee reek to OPN CURT S 4 Fe ~ ” we wwe eee ‘4 ‘ } ry wv rh troinabe rath teen ee we on | as aber ahew se “ owe Seee@ eG" &6re ee ee gene SSeS — iw ta " ij weltigday vy ‘ : Weds teh ootay! “ae . W Orde ee dee tert el ard antes - Lr etl alte atid A We eA wR fete ‘ 4 Argntan vt ad ‘ + AAW VE ‘ dey We tede oad @ ORay a eatewe a ae & a De Wk , « c cat eee) Ot eae bee Loe arg ited ae ener bee evident SL Ut fer AR Man Wk BO LSG See Bh ALA t ' “ AV aed aa rh hee Woe bee ere re doe ee 5 ; Vaud Vid qewt aA sot dear geass ted @ Sree et eanas “ . Ei Waa Al oh, WA hs hd ge ted peed tea watt oe ¥ oVare Pie stawy dys, areeatse dagte an-¥ Ae) U Le ‘ ( \ ih Pie POT BDL ee ote DRT e be) Dede Fe Wee ree able Aw “An i Les AAO Meaed & ene ‘ aw 4 \ ‘ wade te epee }' awe hay srw adel ‘ qj $ bh SAC TA DUStL Da We Peed Lake ‘ o Sa hed TAQ Ge Het wag fete telewia: ' ‘ q i. Oe) oe a Sn ‘ * . wwe TE be ho ba Le bhai “ ahs LO) VALRALOR UA, Sed ed ‘ ma! Aye, wether a ae ¥ eee ed wy, 6 ade weeded oa? , vive a Wele Wa ieatiy tetany Aeqparerasanteds 8 Qed eraree ; . ] , . ys , mire ero in ha} a ‘ ; { : ; : A! yl Moy eohee Oa a? “eda ad eee oe cee Ga ee 4a eW Miter as Woe ed gp ata 4 4 : ' 3 : perpen ssrene? Peer hy heir tite ae a PU Ret EOE et b eee Hai bets aa reeCRC EL Pk boo bo) ; Sele ow latins WNT ee i Peterervs erirec in Pear er ane: trht eral ee Pk DONO TOUTE CL eb Webatdes wat Ga ; PERRY MIME PUM MERC RO UR ELT MCh tt St MUST. DODD TOM UO RAD Eh Dae Obl 8 Oh be ba ew ara Baas 54 AAA dda te aera VE ee ON wed eG A te Red rere aa rte @ Ade) ee eed fee PA La rarisa fare ‘ ae ~~ or ‘ } HW ee ee reed ta ded ak ata @eeakaw ‘ 4 * ayerd i ee , fq arte WO Gah eOrEA hn Sr arin We Rr SER hc] tea Ae tian PeeWee LOOT IN BOOT PO SUR WPUrS DC MERE TODAS DR RAL LLT Ba) eGo As 1B a pees Vai AO ek AE Te Sent te CRUISE AC WL DAC OL ERE LG ct RP) 0) 2 PPPPn WSC ECD MSC tL WC Pe SCEC CR teu bru WUbaLie bbe We sratheQened Gl eon at ee & EC irey mr te et Pode PORE CC he “ ‘ . a4 Wis Nasod week we : orare “@ toe et aad si Wovaed ghack Wotte . a eererir tr. tet ts ae) «ae ae ee eee 8 6 ae eee Pee eh ie ae oh fl AR NER e soa} — oe 2 Z va See Te ar = SS Re Wich sy, RGR ie th ‘de Fm. 4 * 2 y | | oO > : METOT, 35, ons nots S, ne f eo . ro age Pe 4 ee iy eS ay Al F 5 aN ‘es : fies 5 Bi 4 s, ig ‘s cm re “e od, a ~~ Ca = of xs S JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOLUME 48, 1958 PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royrat & GUILFORD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND ACTUAL DATES OF PUBLICATION, VOLUME 48 No. 1, pp. 1-82, March 18, 1958. No. 2, pp. 33-68, April 12, 1958. No. 3, pp. 69-108, April 30, 1958. No. 4, pp. 109-144, May 22, 1958. No. 5, pp. 145-180, June 9, 1958. No. 6, pp. 181-212, July 11, 1958. No. 7, pp. 213-248, August 5, 1958. No. 8, pp. 249-272, September 19, 1958. No. 9, pp. 273-304, November 4, 1958. No. 10, pp. 305-340, December 4, 1958. No. 11, pp. 341-372, January 19, 1959. No. 12, pp. 373-412, February 11, 1959. VOLUME 48 January 1958 NUMBER1 ed Le Co —~ ; , ,r ) J hes Fs — JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Published Monthly by the mero HI NGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD. Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences — Editor: CuznsterR H. Pace, National Bureau of Standards Associate Editors: RonaLD BAMFoRD, University of Maryland Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health IMMANUEL ESTERMANN, Office of Naval Research This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed- ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond- ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien- tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type- written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Proof .—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Ba teg eee Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and $2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com- plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each. Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored, the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against unusual typographical costs. Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author. Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PROCEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. 8. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subseription -Rates for the JouRNAL:—Per Year..:......:....-..- =e $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. tonvol..10; ane). ——not available) fae we ae — - Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).........— 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 _ ) 0288 * Limited number of complete sets of the JoURNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 47, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $393 .50. Monocrapu No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50 INDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.......:.:..-.... 2 .eeeeen $7 .50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete. -... 2.0. .02. 22.2222 52 eee $25.00 Single-volumes, unbound... 225046 0. ee Oe Gee ee 2.00 Singleunmmbersic a. ea whe ee ee oo Lae alee te ee tien ae Prices on request Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and es to the Treasurer, H. 8S. Rappueyre, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12, DiC: Changes of Address —Members are requested to report changes of address promptly to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md. Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vot. 48 January 1958 No. 1 MINERALOGY —Progress in titanium research Matrunw A. Hunter, Rens- selaer Polytechnic Institute. (Communicated by H. C. Vacher.) My first duty is to express my pleasure on being called to give the Burgess Memorial Lecture before the Washington Chapter of the American Society of Metals. Dr. Burgess and I had one point of contact in the first decade of this century that was of ines- timable importance to me. It dealt with the subject of titanium research. The motivation behind the development of titanium research in 1906 was based on the information that this metal had a melt- ing point around 6,000°. It is quite imma- terial whether the scale of temperature was Centigrade or Fahrenheit, as later operations showed. If this high melting point could be confirmed, it was obvious that titanium could jom molybdenum and tungsten, which at that time were under development for filaments in electric lamps. As we now know, the information was false. My own experiments led me to con- clude that the melting point of the titanium produced was between 1,800° and 1,850°C., measured on equipment that would scandal- ize you today. The reactions of the administration to the disappointing news was not calculated to raise the ego of the experimental observer— in this case myself. It was obvious that I must have some confirmation on my melt- ing-point data. It so happened that Dr. Burgess was working on the melting points of refractory elements at the Bureau of Standards. A platinum or an iridium strip was heated under controlled conditions in an atmosphere of hydrogen with visual observa- tion of the melting points of materials placed 1 Highth Annual Burgess Memorial Lecture, Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals. thereon. Samples of titanium (sodium re- duced) were supplied by Dr. Von Warten- berg and by myself. Von Wartenberg Hunter 1,778° 1,790° 1,807 L185 1,815 1,785 Mean 1,800 1 Sia The probable melting point was given by Dr. Burgess as 1,795 + 15. Recent information from the Armour Re- search Foundation gives the melting point of titanium in constitutional diagram as 1,732°C. There would still seem to be some room for argument here. But let us turn now to the subject of this lecture—Research and Development in the Titanium Industry. There are three aspects I shall briefly review—Where have we come from? Where are we now? Where do we ex- pect to go in the future? TITANIUM—GENERAL On an earlier occasion I have given you our attempts to develop a titanium industry (in 1906—1916)—but born 50 years too soon. The industry had to await the later develop- ment of melting under argon or helium, which at the earlier date were laboratory curiosities. But a still greater incentive to development was the desire of industry for airborne metals, with the Federal Govern- ment and the aircraft industry leading the way in the development. From the earliest disclosures of the Du Pont Co. in 1948 to the present time the unlimited resources of the Man . ww A ee oe 2 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 1 Federal Government have been made avail- able to the industry. The metal has no single property that is outstanding, but it has an optimum series of combinations. It is strong, light, ductile, corrosion resistant, and expensive. It is con- sidered to be indispensable for national de- fense. Its military value is estimated at $20 to $50 per pound for military aircraft and when the weight margin is tight, higher premiums can be justified. Its civilian value is given as two to three times that of the materials it can replace. The life expectancy is often much longer, but at present non- military operations consume less than 10 per cent of industrial production. Major problems of the past that are still with us today include melting operations and scrap recovery. Melting at 3,100°F., ti- tanium reacts with every known refractory to become embrittled thereby. Present re- search in skull melting may or may not give the answer to these difficulties. PROGRESS IN THE INDUSTRY The shipment of titanium mill products to industry in recent years is given below: 1950 2,000 pounds 1952 40,000 pounds 1953 200,000 pounds 1954 2,500,000 pounds 1955 3,900,000 pounds 1956 10,000,000 pounds (estimated) No metallurgical operation of which I am aware has ever had so phenomenal a yearly growth from 2,000 pounds in 1950 to 10 million in 1956. Future projections to 35,000 tons in 1958 have been made. The important factor of prices for sponge, billet, and sheet from 1951 to the present appear in Fig. 1. It is clear that the industry is moving ahead with increased volume of production coupled directly with a lowering in cost of materials produced. Now let me give you “What Industry Thinks of Itself.” WHAT THE TITANIUM INDUSTRY THINKS OF ITSELF C. I. Bradford, president of Rem-Cru Titanium Inc., speaking before a recent Mining Congress made some pertinent re- marks on titanium progress. The year 1956 can be summarized as the year in which the aircraft industry gave titanium a solid vote of confidence as a standard engineering material for production components. This vote of confidence resulted in a three fold increase in demand for ti- tanium mill products in 1956 over 1955. Final industry figures should clear the 5,000- ton mark. The same trend appears certain to continue in 1957. A minimum demand of 10,000 tons of mill products is our present estimate. Chase Brass & Copper will melt and fabricate the titanium metal. Production of billets is slated for late 1958. Since costs per annual ton of capacity in Electromet’s sodium reduction plant are reputed to be at the rate of $4,125 per annual ton this commitment of 41 million should produce 10,000 tons per year. Japanese sources are expected to continue or increase their output of 2,500 tons/year. I have no figures at hand on the melting capacity of Titanium Metals Corporation of America, Republic Steel Corporation, and other melting plants. Rem-Cru reports its melting capacity to be 6,000—7,000 ingot tons | per year. In the fabrication field Certificates of Necessity have been issued to T.M.C.A. and Eastern Stainless Co. for 50 inch Sendzimir Cold Strip Mills for rolling and processing titanium. T.M.C.A. considers this development to be particularly urgent in view of the transi- tion of aircraft and missiles into high speed flight where high skin temperatures cause present materials to lose their strength. In addition, titanium and its alloys have been developed and evaluated for incorporation into jet engines. There would seem to be little question that the present industrial plants will be able to meet all potential de- mands of the titanium industry. TITANIUM ALLOYS The compelling motive, in engineering construction, for the use of titanium as a re- placement for the more common materials of construction comes from the high strength- weight ratio of this material at temperatures up to 1,000°F., while in the chemical in- dustry the relative resistance to corrosion JANUARY 1958 plays the predominant role. The develop- ments in recent years in the titanium alloy field have gone a long way in establishing titanium priority. THE 6 ALUMINUM, 4 VANADIUM ALLOY One of the more important alloys is Ti- 6Al-4V developed by Armour Research Foundation under government sponsorship. Early studies showed it to have an excellent combination of tensile strength and ductility, with good resistance to impact and high strength at elevated temperatures. Produc- tion was initiated in 1954 and at the present time the alloy is one of the most popular of the commercial compositions. It is being used in large quantities in ordnance, airframe and aircraft engine applications and is cur- rently available as wire, sheet, bar, and forging billet as well as other mill products. The mechanical properties of alloy Ti 75 A of the year 1950 and of Ti-6Al-4V (annealed of 1955) are compared in the following table: eee 600°F 1950 Ti 75 A Tensile strength... .. 98,000 psi; 45,000 psi Wield 2). 81,000 psi | 28,000 psi Blongation m 2”... 23 psi 38 psi i950 Lin6 Al 4V (an- nealed) Tensile strength.....| 143,000 105,000 Wigil 2. 2 ee 131,000 93 , 000 Blongation in 2”..... 16 19 By proper heat treatment a tensile strength of 200,000 psi can be obtained. The more re- cent data on the alloy 155 A show improve- ments in properties of a similar character. EFrrect oF Hear TREATMENT ON THE TENSILE Properties oF Tr 155A 5 An, 1.5 tis, 105) IMO, Ld) (Cie Annealed Heat treated* Tensile Strength.......| 159,000 208 , 000 Mield strength......... 155 , 000 197 , 000 Mongatiion im I”....... 23 10 Reduction in area..... 45 2.6 “Heat treatment—Solution temp. 17,00°F— water quenched aged 4 hours at 1,000°F. With such high strength alloys as these, ti- tanium can compete on a strength. weight HUNTER: PROGRESS IN TITANIUM RESEARCH Ww KEY FORM BASIS ZO Sponge 5000 |b. NSN Billet 2500 |b.- 8in. round - titanium alloy Ba Sheet 2500 |b.-0.025 X 36x 96in. *2Finish- commercially pure 20 .o, q 4 S< TF, % A x 2 SRO O ISIS INL SOOT ROOT ereteteerelecetes: XX e. a2, ree . KS 4 fae] b Keo AZ a I 5 %e, ee Meee So, , ze a 0x Kx ee, ost 4 OS é Bed Kee KR A Kod ee i x oe hee RS ei ee < LS Ss Be Bo ee ie 3 Ne es ee $y ee BS O A 4, 210 Ne NGL ON & oe Bes] 0% Bes) or Se io, A Ne Ne Nes Ne Ni i Ne ae NS Ne Ne No Ne Ne NX N=. Ne NS as bad Ne se Ne BS Ni NG NS NG ONS BS “ d °, 9 s Na Ne NS NS NM f& S Ne Ne Ns NS 4) Ns NE 4 Ms Yy od Y oy NY ey Ne NS < NN aN a: a: aN SNS NS INS NS es NSN ZN: EN EN NS NN IN: JN: GN ee Nal ZNSE AAS OARS ASS oL ASS VANS UNS UNE ZS Ne I951-52 195 1954 1955 195 Present Hineael ratio basis with most of the present materials of construction. Fig. 2 shows the marked superiority of Ti-6Al-4V over aluminum al- loys and stainless steels in temperature ranges from room to 1,000°F. With such fig- ures as these, titanium alloys become im- portant factors in engineering construction and will assume a wider significance. Production of Titanium Metal Sodium or magnesium as a_ reducing agent.—The earlier methods for the produc- tion of sponge titanium from the tetra- chloride involved the use of magnesium as the reducing agent. Later operations have used sodium as the reducing agent. The costs of the operation by the two methods are said to be practically identical by Kroll? The cost of the titanium chloride represents 50 per cent of the sponge price and the sodium or magnesium contributes 20 per cent to the cost of the titanium product. In view of this, consumers and potential users are asking: Can we design more ti- tanlum into our aircraft, our engines, our chemical plants, with the assurance that there will be an ample supply of titanium to meet our requirements. The answer when we look at the outlook for ““VeSs? Behind this optimism is the assurance of adequate supplies of raw materials for 1957. The situation by mid or late 1957 will be: 1957 is definitely * Metallurgical Rev., 1956, vol. 1:1-3, 291. “ JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, swore | | Plant cost | | Annual mae | $ pepemnual Grametulmeerwer soos ee 6,000 | 4,150 Wows Ghemircalens 9-545 es SOOT — DusPonty eer cera i Nate ZOOW TG oR 50 National Distillers.......-| 5,000 a Titanium Metals Corp..... | 9,000 7 AIS Unione@anoideme eee eer. 7,500 | 4,125 Total capacity. . 36,500 * The figures for plant cost per annual ton were taken from TML Report No. 52, Sept. 7, 1956. Recent estimates by the personnel of the Bureau of Mines in Boulder City, Nev., indi- cate that the cost per annual ton of new plant capacity may be as low as $2,500. Another development in the sponge pic- ture comes from the public press. Chemical and Engineering News, December 31, 1956, and Wall Street Journal state that Allied Chemical & Dye and Kennecott Copper plan a jointly owned company to produce and sell titanium for uses ranging from Jet aircraft to vacuum tubes. Initial investment is expected to be $40,000,000. The installation is to make titanium tetrachloride, titanium sponge, and billets of titanium metal. Allied Chemical 1200 800 400 200 te) 200 400 . 6AI-4V(HT. TRTD) IMO™M90ODP says the company will use a new continuous process which employs sodium to reduce titanium tetrachloride to sponge by processes represented to be continuous. The sodium reduction develops one third more heat than the reduction by magnesium. The sodium requires one third more electrical energy for its production than magnesium does. So far as this observer knows mag- nesium chloride is recycled to recover mag- nesium but no recycling is undertaken for the sodium chloride. Sodium chloride melts at 800°, and mag- nesium chloride at 720°C., but sodium re- ductions can be carried on at much lower temperatures than 800°C. since the sub- chlorides of titanium form complexes (TiC],3NaCl) which melt at 554° and dis- sociate at 600°C. Much of the sodium reduc- tion can in fact be carried on in the solid state as will appear in a later section of this paper. Sodium metal is much easier to purify than magnesium. Ceramic filters can be used to remove oxides. This is not possible with magnesium. Further, sodium can be pumped to the spot where it is to be used. In leaching operations sodium chloride solutions do not attack titanium sponge. Excess reducing . 2024S-T 7075S-T 301- +H 17-7-PH{TH-1075) 4130, 4140, 4340 Ti-8Mn (ANLD.) Fey £64 ksi Fry 274 ksi Fry =155 ksi Fry £174 ksi Fry =168 ksi Fry =120 ksi Fry =180 ksi Ti-100 Fy, =100 ksi 600 800 1000 1200 Temperature, F Fic. 2.Strength-weight comparison on the basis of ultimate tensile strength density JANUARY 1958 agent can be kept to 5 per cent with sodium whereas with magnesium it may amount to 15 per cent. Leaching with water is cheaper than distilling off magnesium chloride but the hydrogen content of the leached sponge may be high and must be eliminated by other means. The recycled magnesium is said to make an important cost saving. Other interesting observations are that molten sodium chloride dissolves 20 per cent of sodium at 850°C. which would separate as a fog on cooling. Titanium tetrachloride has practically no solubility in molten NaCl. Its vapor pressure is so high that it rapidly boils off. The lower chlorides with higher boiling points appear to dissolve in all proportions. The present Kroll process is the only well established procedure for reducing titanium tetrachloride with metallic magnesium. But the sodium reduction can follow several procedures of which the following are more important. SODIUM REDUCTION OF TITANIUM TETRACHLORIDE (1) Low temperature operations at 200°C. This is the “high surface”’ sodium operations described in advertising literature by Na- tional Distillers to produce subchlorides of titanium or even titanium metal. In this procedure when liquid sodium is stirred into solid salt, it coats each crystal. The tetra- chloride when introduced reacts with this sodium layer to produce the dichloride. If this material is then subjected to further additions of sodium metal and then set aside for hours to complete the reduction, the finely divided titanium powder will grow larger crystal grains which can be leached with water without difficulty. Little or no external energy other than the heat of the reaction is required to complete the process. Similar processes are described by J. P. Quinn’ of Imperial Chemical industries. (2) The reaction can be carried out at 800°-850°C. At 650°-750°C. the salt complex of NaCl and TiCl, is molten. At 805°C. the molten bath will produce needles of titanium with a Brinell hardness of less than 70. (3) At still higher temperatures the ti- $ British Patents 7179380, Nov. 1954; 720517, Dec. 1954. HUNTER: PROGRESS IN TITANIUM RESEARCH Z tanium chloride and sodium can react and produce droplets of solidified titanium such as appeared in the early bomb experiments. DISPROPORTIONATION In many of these reactions with the sub- chlorides of titanium disproportionation probably plays an important role. From Report No. 20-88, Jet Propulsion Lab., California Inst. Tech., I quote the fol- lowing: ‘‘Hydrogen may be used to reduce TiCl(g) to TiCl3(s) at low temperatures. While the reaction is thermo-dynamically complete at room temperatures, the rate is negligible.” TiCl;(s) and TiCl.(s) are not reduced ap- preciably by hydrogen at elevated tempera- ture since these compounds are stronger reducing agents than hydrogen. When these compounds are heated disproportionation oc- curs as the dominant reaction. Metallic titanium may be formed com- pletely from such reactions at temperatures as low as 600°C. TiCl, disproportionates and vaporizes as follows: 2 TiCh(s) > TiCl.(g) + Ti 2 MCL) — 2 TAC@) 2 Th. Laboratory analysis of the product after the reaction showed it to contain more than 95 per cent of titanium metal. But 2 TiCl; — TiCh,(g) + TiClo(s), which reacts further to give metallic titanium. It is highly probable that the titanium precipi- tating from a sodium chloride molten salt will prefer to precipitate on titanium lattices that already exist in the solution. By such means then crystals of titanium will continue to grow, as we have already observed. OTHER REDUCTION PROCEDURES The simplest procedure for producing titanium would seem to be the reduction of the abundant titanium dioxide (rutile). Laboratory investigations of Chretien and Wyss! indicate that magnesium will reduce the dioxide to monoxide (T10) while calcium will complete the reduction to titanium metal. Similar procedures are the subject of ‘Chretien and Wyss, Compt. Rend. 224: 1642. 1947. 6 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 1 patents? to Dominion Magnesium tide 2 have no information on large scale indus- trial operations. There have been many attempts to pro- duce titanium by electrolytic methods. The following cell feeds have been used—ti- tanium tetrachloride, titanium oxide, or potassium titanium fluoride. The ideal electrolytic cell will require a diaphragm or its physical equivalent to pre- vent the anodic product, oxygen or chlorine, from reoxidizing the titanium subsaits pro- duced at the cathode. This introduces many complications that to date have not been adequately met. Real progress in electrolytic recovery and refining has been made by the Bureau of Mines group in Boulder City, Nev., which 1s described in the next section. ELECTROLYTIC REFINING OF TITANIUM BUREAU OF MINES—-BOULDER CITY An active research group under the direc- tion of Messrs. Blue and Baker has presented some outstanding results in the field of the electrolytic refining of titanium. The pro- gram began as an electrolytic operation for the refining of titanium scrap. The success has been so remarkable that the method gives promise of being hereafter an important phase in the extractive production of ti- tanium metal from its basic ores. The electrolytic cell designed and used by the Bureau is made from 14-inch mild steel plate—heated by Globar units and protected externally from oxidation by a spray coat of chromium aluminum alloy. The electrolyte is a 5-per cent solution of titanium dichloride (TiCls) in sodium chlo- ride maintained molten around 830°C. The minimum allowable current density is given as 550 amperes per square foot. Higher cur- rents can be used in more concentrated solu- tions but the quality of the metal produced drops off at the higher current densities. In a 4,700-ampere cell four cathodes of sheet steel were distributed along the longer axis of the cell. (The number could be in- definitely increased by lengthening the cell without interfering with regular operation.) This cell was actually running at 3200 am- 5 British Patent 664061, Jan. 1952. peres and was producing 2,800 grams of cathode titanium per hour at an energy con- sumption of 26-27 KWH per pound of metal. Much of this electrical energy was consumed in keeping the bath molten. It was estimated that a 10,000 ampere cell would maintain its temperature without external heat. The material to be refined is thrown into the bottom of the tank. An anode connection to the outside of the tank completes the electric circuit. The deposit continues with- out interruption for four hours with practi- cally no attention. Helium supplies the mert atmosphere. In argon the sublimation of salt is greater for reasons unknown. The deposit is drained for 15 minutes in the inert atmosphere above the cell and cooled for one hour when it can be safely removed. The drag out is unusually small—approxi- mately two-tenths pound of salt per pound of metal withdrawn. The deposit which is highly crystalline in character is readily washed with water acidulated with hydro- ehloriec acid. A 1,000-ampere cell ran with a current efficiency of 78 percent and a 4,000-ampere cell ran 70 days at 85 percent. From a large number of runs (100 or more) 65 per cent of the product was less than 70 BHN, 22 per cent was plus 70 to 80 BHN, 5 per cent was over 100 BHN, 3 per cent be- tween 100-140 BHN, and 5 per cent was over 140 BHN. In the hands of the skilled operators at Boulder City there appears to be no difficulty in the continuous running of the cells. The engineering features in their simplicity are in strange contrast to some of the electrolytic monstrosities which I have seen in other laboratories. I failed to mention that the starting ma- terial used in the runs just outlined was titanium scrap with a Brinell hardness of 350. As a means of upgrading scrap the op- eration was quite a successful one. Chemical and Engineering News for De- cember 31, 1956, carries a reference to the use of an electrorefining operation for scrap recovery by Mallory Sharon Titanium Com- pany under the direction of Dr. R. S$. Dean. The method followed would appear to be that indicated by the Boulder City Bureau of Mines. JANUARY 1958 A special importance attaches to this re- fining process in view of the prospect of refining cheap titanium or titanium alloys made by carbon, silicon, or metallothermic re- duction of oxides. This electrolysis of soluble anodes for titanium refining offers new possi- bilities, the potentialities of which have still to be explored. The approach to this problem is further developed in a recent brochure which I re- ceived from Chicago Development Corpora- tion on Electrolytic Titanium from which I quote. A more practical method for the large scale reduction of titaniferous ores and slags is alumino- thermic reduction. Economically, Sorel Slag is an excellent starting material for use in aluminothermic reduction as it is cheap, has a high percentage of titanium dioxide and forms a low melting titanium-aluminum iron alloy which can be separated easily from the oxide products after reduction. The Sorel slag, which is a black, lumpy material, is dried, ground to —100 mesh, mixed with aluminum scrap, and heated in an induction furnace to 1200° and 1300° C. Although the reaction is exothermic, added heat is necessary to allow the metal to coagulate and the resultant oxide products to form a slag at the top. Both a flux of 90% calcium fluoride and 10% sodium aluminum fluoride, and a flux of 50% ecal- cium oxide, 45% calcium floride and 5% sodium aluminum fluoride have been used successfully. From a sorel slag with an initial composition of 80% TiO, Oo. TAY FeO Bo SiO. 4.7% MgO a reduced product was obtained which contained Ti 75.0% Al 10.0% Fe CD Oz 3 BY, The material was bottom poured into an argon filled mold which casts the alloy into plates that can be hammer milled to the desired particle size as a feed for the electrolytic cell. In following up such investigations as this, the HUNTER: PROGRESS IN TITANIUM RESEARCH 7 silicothermic reduction of titanium ores must also receive some consideration. In fact it lies well within the bounds of possibility that combinations of carbon, silicon and aluminum used as reducing agents can produce a satisfactory ferrotitanium product for ultimate electrolytic refining. A high concentration of titanium carbide in the resultant product would present some difficulties in carbon removal in the final electrolysis. As a final word to the story I can say that the members of the Titanium Review Com- mittee of the Materials Advisory Board, chairmaned by Dr. Frances C. Frary, in reviewing the annual progress in titanium extraction research are in accord in thinking that the recent development in electrolytic research at Boulder City represents the first major break-through in new titanium de- velopments in the metal production field. It eliminates the chlorination feature of the ex- pensive titanium tetrachloride. If the cheap- est of our titanium ores can be converted by arc melting to ferrotitanium alloys, the elec- trolytic process can convert this product to a high-grade titanium which might be superior in quality to any metal produced to date by sodium or by magnesium reduc- tion of the tetrachloride. There will be a considerable time lag in getting such a process into competitive com- mercial production but the increasing market for titanium sponge will give present plants adequate opportunity to recoup their cost with the 5-year amortization. I consider it of the greatest importance that the electrothermal reduction of titanium oxide and the electrolytic refining of the re- sulting alloy at the Boulder City, Nev., sta- tion of The Bureau of Mines should be ade- quately supported and that the experi- mental work be pushed as rapidly as possible. In the hght of these later developments, | believe that the future holds high promise for better and even cheaper titanium as an engineering material in production. 8 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 48Nosnl PALEONTOLOGY .—Some Lower Ordovician monoplacophoran mollusks from Missouri... Ettis L. YocuEetson, U.S. Geological Survey. (Communicated by H. A. Rehder.) (Received August 6, 1957) The discovery of a living representative ot monoplacophoran mollusks (Neopzlina gala- theae) dredged from deep water off the west coast of Central America (Lemche, 1957, pp. 413-416) has aroused much interest among students of mollusks. Monoplaco- phorans previously had been known only as fossils in rocks of Cambrian through Devo- nian age. On the basis of the paired muscle sears found in the fossil shells the Mono- placophora have been interpreted as primi- tive mollusks that have not undergone torsion (Wenz, 1940; Knight, 1952). The soft anatomy of the Recent species Neopilina galatheae Lemche, confirms the supposition as to the primitiveness of the group. At the same time, this discovery has em- phasized the need for more study of the fossils. An unexpected feature of the Recent species, not reported from fossil taxa, is an asymmetrical coiled larval shell. Lemche (1957, p. 414) suggests that the Silurian genus Pilina Koken was characterized by an asymmetrical nucleus. Unfortunately, he based this opinion on drawing of a specimen which has long been lost, and this important detail cannot be checked. I have examined the U. 8. National Mu- seum and the U. S. Geological Survey collections in the hope of finding some mono- placophorans that would provide informa- tion on early growth stages. Three specimens of one species were obtained which give some information on this subject. Specimens of two other species, showing well-preserved muscle scars, were also found. These three species, two of which belong to new genera, are described and figured below. The collections of the U.S. National Mu- seum contain numerous specimens of the Cambrian monoplacophoran Scenella Bull- ings. The muscle scars of one species of the genus have previously been described (Ras- etti, 1954). Some Middle Ordovician speci- mens, particularly types and figured speci- 1 Publication authorized by the Director of the U.S. Geological Survey. mens, are also in the collections, as are a few Silurian specimens. Upon preliminary exam- ination, none of these specimens showed either muscle scars or details of the apical area. During their tenure with the U. 5. Geo- logical Survey, the late Drs. E. O. Ulrich and Josiah Bridge obtained numerous Lower Ordovician gastropods for a proposed mono- graphic study. In the course of this work nearly 200 specimens of monoplacophorans were collected from outcrops or were con- tributed by other institutions. The three species described below are from the Ulrich and Bridge collection. No previously described species are re- ferred to the new genera described below. Most North American monoplacophoran species were described between 60 and 70 years ago, and at the time little emphasis was placed on muscle scars by American writers. Thorough monographic treatment of the group, particularly restudy and reil- lustration of type specimens, is needed. John W. Koenig, Missouri Geological Sur- vey, provided information regarding the fossil localities. I am indebted to Dr. J. Brookes Knight for his ideas regarding the significance of these specimens. Photographs were taken by Nelson W. Shupe of the U.5. Geological Survey. Class AMPHINEURA Order MONOPLACOPHORA Family TRYBLIDIIDAE Subfamily TRYBLIDIINAE Cyrtonellopsis Yochelson, n. gen. Type species —Cyrtonellopsis huzzahensis Yochelson, n. sp. Diagnosis.—Deep, cap-shaped monoplaco- phorans with a strongly curved asymmetrical apex not projecting far over anterior; dorsum. smoothly curved; muscle scars unknown; shell and ornament unknown. Discussion.—When these specimens were dis- covered in the collections, I was unable to place JANUARY 1958 YOCHELSON: LOWER ORDOVICIAN MONOPLACOPHORAN MOLLUSKS so) iil Fies. 1-4.—Cyrtonellopsis huzzahensis, n. gen., n. sp.: 1, Right side view of holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 135181; 2, apical view of paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 135182;3, apical view of paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 135183: 4, apical view of holotype. Figs. 5-9.—Bipulvina crofisae, n. gen., n. sp.: 5, Oblique top view of holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 135184: 6, side view of paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 135185a;7, top view of holotype; 8, oblique side view of holot ype showing bifurcation of apex; 9, top view of paratype. Fies. 10-13.—Proplina cornutaformis (Walcott): 10, Right side view of plesiotype, U.S.N.M. no. 135186a; 11, left side view of plesiotype; 12, apical view of plesiotype; 13, top view of plesiotype All figures twice natural size, except 2 (natural size) and 8 (three times natural size 10 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES them generically. After examining photographs of them, Knight (written communication) sug- gested that they represented a new genus closely allied to the Devonian genus Cyrtonella Hall, 1879. Examination of specimens of Cyrtonella confirms this opinion. The similarity even extends to the asymmetry of the juvenile shell (Knight, 1941, pp. 95-96). The principal difference between the two genera is that Cyrtonella has a ridge on the dorsum, and Cyrtonellopsis has a smoothly rounded dorsum. Because of their strongly curved apex, these two genera are atypical of the Tryblidiinae (Knight, 1952, pp. 46-47). Further study may show that they should be placed in another subfamily or another family. Cyrtonellopsis huzzahensis Yochelson, n. sp. Figs. 1-4 Description Strongly curved monoplaco- phorans with a subcircular aperture; available specimens from about 2.0 cm to 3.5 cm in length, apex just overhanging anterior margin and strongly asymmetrical either sinistrally or dex- trally; shell expanding rapidly so that it is rela- tively deep and completing about three-fourths of one whorl; aperture subcircular, the anterior part slightly compressed laterally; dorsum fol- lowing a curve nearly the are of a circle; shell unknown but presumably thin. Discussion—When the holotype is oriented with the aperture down and the apex toward the observer, the hooked apex bends strongly toward the right. On one paratype the apex is inclined to the right but is nearly symmetrical. On the other paratype, the apex is strongly inclined to the left. Several colleagues have examined these steinkerns, or internal shell fillings, and all agree that the specimens have not been deformed by compaction of sediment, deformation of strata, or other geologic features. The asymmetry shown ean be considered as basic to the living animal. If this assumption is granted, the specimens are significant for three reasons: (1) the hook- shaped apical filing preserved on these steinkerns is evidence that the early growth stages of the shell were curved for at least part of one whorl. As a steinkern is not always a true reflection of the exterior, it is reasonable to assume that the shell was more strongly coiled than is shown directly by the specimen. (2) The specimens show that in the Lower Ordovician at least one genus of monoplacophorans had an asymmetrical protoconch. Though the muscle scars of Cyrtonel- VoL. 48, No; 1 lopsis are unknown, the general form is so similar to Cyrtonella, the two taxa probably had similar musculature. (3) If the three specimens are a sample of a living population, they show that the asymmetry of the early whorls was variable among individuals. Cyrtonellopsis huzzahensis strengthens the in- terpretation that the living Neopilina galatheae Lemche (1957, p. 4161, figs. 1-4) is a mono- placophoran. The coiled larval shell of that species is not atypical but is something that can be at least partly demonstrated from the fossil record. Comparison of Cyrtonellopsis with specimens of Cyrtonella has confirmed the indi- vidual variation of the asymmetrical protoconch in Cyrtonella. The taxonomic importance of the assymmetrical protoconch cannot be evaluated until more information is available regarding this feature in other genera. It is reasonable to con- sider the early growth stages of the monoplaco- phorans as a larval adaptation and as such, they have limited taxonomic usefulness. Locality —U.8S.G.S. locality 238 (green), Cambrian-Ordovician register. Huzzah Creek section, on Huzzah Creek 1 mile west of mouth of Dry Creek, on Missouri Highway 8, about 8 miles east of Steeleville. Mr. Koenig suggests that the section is probably in the SW!148SW!4 sec. 26, T. 38 N., R. 3 W, Crawford County, Mo. Collected by E. O. Ulrich and H. E. Dickout, August 23, 1906. The register lists the formation as Gasconade dolomite. Catalogued specimens.—Holotype US.N.M. no. 135181. Paratypes U.S.N.M. nos. 135182, 135183. Genus Proplina Kobayashi, 1933 Type species —Metaptoma cornutaforme Wal- cott. Diagnosis.—Laterally compressed monoplaco- phorans have the apex projecting far over the anterior margin of aperture; interior of shell with six sets of paired muscle scars, one pair anterior and high in the shell, four spaced uniformly along the sides of the shell, and one pair on the posterior slope. 2 The Paleontology and Stratigraphy Branch of the U. S. Geological Survey maintains several locality registers for the various internal sub- divisions. These are differentiated by colors on the locality numbers attached to specimens. The ‘“‘oreen’’ series, Cambrian-Ordovician, are no longer in current use being superseded by an ‘“‘orange’’ register. ‘ JANUARY 1958 Discusston.—Kobayashi (1933, p. 263) re- marked that the muscle scars of this genus are “represented by an impressed band near the aperture.”’ Actually muscle scars cannot be seen on the specimens he described, and cannot be seen on the primary types of Proplina cornuta- formis (Walcott) (Knight, 1941, p. 274). Knight (1952, p. 47) placed the genus within the Tryblidi- inae and in a footnote stated that he examined specimens of Proplina from the Ulrich and Bridge collection which showed monoplacophoran muscle scars. Though the importance of these specimens is obvious, they have never been previously described or figured. Proplina cornutaformis (Walcott) Figs. 10-13 Metoptoma cornutaforme Walcott, 1879, p. 129 Metoptoma cornutaforme Walcott. Lesley, 1889, p. 204, figs. Triblidium cornutaforme (Walcott). Walcott, 1912, p. 263, pl. 41, figs. 12-14. Proplina cornutaformis (Walcott). Knight, 1941, p. 274, pl. 4, figs. 2a-2c. Proplina cornutaformis (Walcott). Knight, 1944, p. 487, pl. 174, fig. 11. Description.—Laterally compressed ovoid, rela- tively deep monoplacophorans, with apex pro- jecting over anterior apertural margin; available specimens from about 1.0 cm to 3.5 cm in length; aperture strongly compressed at anterior, moder- ately rounded at posterior, so that shell is wedge shaped when viewed from above; shell relatively deep, in the mature stage flattened on the dorsum in side view; outer surface with numerous, equally spaced concentric rugae, not reflected on the interior of the shell; apex only slightly curved; approximately one-fourth of shell projecting over anterior margin in early growth stages and nearly one-fifth of shell projecting at maturity; interior of shell with six sets of paired muscle; anterior muscle scars located about one-third of the distance from apex to posterior of margin, and relatively high in the cup; the first scar consisting of a sharp short depression in shell trending near 45° to the margin of the aperture and a posteriorly elongated slight swelling located behind the depression; the second to fifth sets of sears on the steep lateral sides, closer to the apertural margin than the first set, these four pairs of sears nearly equally spaced, with the second scar below the swelling noted above, and the fifth posteriorly, some three-fourths of the YOCHELSON: LOWER ORDOVICIAN MONOPLACOPHORAN MOLLUSKS Al. total length of the shell; the second pair of scars faint and obscure in detail; the third through fifth formed of elongate narrow depressions in- clined near 60° to the margin of the aperture each with a posterior swelling, but neither the depression nor swelling having sharp margins: the sixth pair of scars on the posterior slope, somewhat wider than the others, widening and dying out toward the posterior margin, but con- tinuing as faint furrows up along the dorsum above the general level of the other scars for some two-fifths of the length of the shell; interior of shell with a flattened area on dorsum just anterior to furrows of posterior set of muscles. Discussion.—The above description is based on reexamination of the types and topotypes, all from limestone and showing the external orna- ment and general form, supplemented by chert steinkerns preserving the impression of the shell interior. One measurement suggests that the shell covering these steinkerns was about 0.4 mm thick. This thickness of shell would account for most of the differences of shape between the calcareous shells and the steinkerns. The possi- bility remains that the steinkerns may represent a distinct species. Perhaps the single most important difference is that the steinkerns do not reflect the rugosities shown in the shell ex- terior of the limestone specimens. In the present state of our knowledge of the monoplacophorans, however, it seems wiser to construe the species broadly than name a new species. In addition to the type, three other American species have been referred to this genus. Proplina cornutaformis has a less elongate apex than P. acuta (Whitfield) (1889, p. 45, pl. 7, figs. 9-11) and a more elongate apex than P. unguiformis (Ulrich, in Ulrich and Scofield) (p. 848, pl. 61, fig. 42-44). The type species is lower and has a steeper slope of the shell below the apex than does P. barabuensis (Whitfield) (1878, p. 60) Proplina cornutaformis (Walcott) differs from P. bridge. Kobayashi (1933, p. 263, pl. 5, fig. 2) described from southern relatively and significantly higher. It Manchuria, in being ditters from P. ampla Kobayashi as figured (Kobayashi, 1933) on plate 4, figure 2, in having the posterior slope not abruptly set off at an angle. The speci men of P. ampla figured on plate 5, figure 4, probably should be referred to Cyrtonellapsis Locality —The chert steinkerns showing muse sears, one of which is figured, are from U.S.G.S 242¢ Cambrian-Ordovician loeality (green), i, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES register. Teagues Creek, Webster County, Mo. The specimens probably were obtained at or near the Teagues Creek lead workings located in Avs SINSATION A Wee. @, It, AB) IN, Th. la WW Speci- mens were collected in 1891 by W. P. Jenny. The register lists the formation as “Hirst Mag- nesian limestone.’”’ A label with the collection in Josiah Bridge’s handwriting — states “Lower Cotter Catalogued specimens.—Plesiotypes, US.N.M. nos. 135186a-135186v. Bipulvina Yochelson, n. gen. Type species.—Bipulvina croftsae Yochelson, n. Sp. Diagnosis.—Low, spoon-shaped monoplaco- phorans having the interior of the dorsum flat- tened for more than half of its length and set off from the anterior and posterior slopes; apex strongly anterior, just projecting over apertural margin; five pairs of subtriangular lateral muscle scars located relatively high on lateral slopes, with some additional markings on anterior slope; ornament unknown; interior of shell with two furrows parallel to lines of muscle scars. Discussion —Bipulvina fits clearly within the Tryblidiinae as listed by Knight (1952, p. 46, 47). Even though the external ornament of Bipulvina is unknown, it can be distinguished readily from other members of the subfamily. The shell is lower and much less curved than that of Cyrtonella Hall, 1879, or Vallatotheca Foerste, 1914. Both Vallatotheca and Pilina Koken, 1925, have strong rugosities which would be reflected on the shell interior; such rugosities are missing from Bipulvina. The apex of Bipulvina is less pointed than that of Drahomira Perner and Proplina Kobayashi, 1933, Helctonopsis Ulrich and Scofield, 1897, is not well known, but seem- ingly has a lower shell more strongly curved along the dorsum. Bipulvina is closest to Tryblidium Lindstrém, 1884, in shape, but has a different musculature than that genus, possessing only five pairs of muscles, rather than six. In some ways Brpulvina is a more complex shell than Tryblidium as it has a different sort of musculature at the anterior than on the main part of the body. Pilina unguis (Lindstrém) shows differentiation of the anterior scar or scars (Lindstrém, 1880, pl. 9, fig. 2) but the anterior slope is unlike that of B. croftsae. It is tempting to homologize the six or eight VOL) 435sNiGrae muscles of the tryblidiids with the imdividual plates of the Amphineura (Knight, 1952, p. 22) but Bipulvina shows that, in detail, such homol- ogy is not exact or necessarily correct. Bipulvina croftsae Yochelson, n. sp. Figs. 5-9 Description —Low, spoon-shaped monoplaco- phorans with two depressions on dorsum of shell interior paralleling the two lmes of muscle scars; available specimens about 2.5 em in length; aperture oval, rounded anteriorly and posteriorly, wider at the latter end; cast of apex relatively blunt, just overhanging the anterior margin; ornament and thickness of shell unknown; dor- sum of steinkern, when viewed in profile, flat- tened and gently inclined, bending abruptly at the anterior slope and less abruptly at the longer posterior slope; five distinct sets of paired muscle sears located relatively high in the shell between the anterior and posterior slopes, the most for- ward set being just posterior to the anterior slope; muscle scars in shell subtriangular with a point to- ward the apex, deepest at the point and shallowing posteriorly, the first muscle scar longer than those posteriorly, each scar crossed by several growth lines concave forward, the lowermost edges of all the muscle scars joined and still farther sunk into the shell; central to the lines of muscle scars there are two shallow linear furrows coalescing on the anterior slope and dying out posteriorly, the area of the shell between these rounded de- pressions being raised and flattened; anterior slope of shell interior with several markings, pos- sibly muscle scars, but fainter and smaller than those posteriorly; markings in the form of two paired ridges and depressions, occurring anterior to first clear large muscle scar, with a third smaller depression just posterior to the apex and above the apical construction noted below, with two flattened subtriangular shell thickenings pro- jecting inward near the apex; evidence of a short median septum anterior to these projec- tions; a set of paired crescent shaped markings occurring at the extreme anterior under the apex where the shell begins to flare out near the margin; a pair of elongate weltlike ridges in- clined 30° to the margin occurring anteriorly about midway between the apex and the first clear muscle scar, but relatively close to the margin; and a pair of shorter ridges occurring below the first large muscle with other similar, JANUARY 1958 though fainter, ridges posteriorly, their exact spacing and number not determined. Discussion.—The description of Brpulvina croftsae is based on three steinkerns preserved in chert. The first is incomplete and rather poor, and shows only the lines of muscle scars and paralleling depressions. These depressions are represented as ridges above, or dorsal, to the muscles. The second steinkern shows the shape well, but does not preserve many details. The third is incomplete but exceedingly well pre- served; it is on this specimen that most details of the anterior were seen. Five sets of paired muscle scars are on the main body of the steinkern. They are limited to the flattened area set off from the anterior and posterior slopes. The scars are all high on the sides, stand in relief, and appear to be relatively large and deep compared to the scars of other monoplacophorans. They indicate a fairly thick shell, as thin shells of patelliform mollusks com- monly either lack muscle scars or have them poorly developed. The flaring at the margin of the steinkerns is another indication of a relatively thick shell. Secondary deposits may have further augmented the shell thickness and may be the cause of the flattening of the dorsum as they are in Tryblidium reticulatum Lindstrom (Knight, 1941, p. 364). The markings on the anterior slope are all fainter than those posteriorly and are of a differ- ent shape. They are more the ridge and depres- sion type seen in Proplina cornutaformis (Wal- cott), though of course much smaller. Two sets ean be seen clearly; the one just posterior to the apex is so faint it might be interpreted differently by another observer. Whatever their exact num- ber and position, these markings on the anterior of the steinkern indicate a differentiated head region, and suggest a fairly complex musculature. In contrast to these faint markings on the anterior slope, the constriction at the apex is quite clear. It is seen on two steinkerns as a depressed and flattened subtriangular area on each side of apex. This depression may connect with the lowest shallow depression just posterior to it. Anterior to the constriction, the apex of one steinkern is bifurcated. This bifurcation suggests the presence of a short median septum in the shell. An alternative explanation, which cannot be checked until further specimens are obtained, is that the apex of the shell was not completely filled with chert before the shell was dissolved. YOCHELSON: LOWER ORDOVICIAN MONOPLACOPHORAN MOLLUSKS 13 On the anterior lateral slopes just above the line where the steinkern flares out to the margin and just anterior to the first large muscle scar, paired elongate ridges are quite clear. The are present as sharp depressions in the steinkern. Other depressions, much shallower, but of similar size and shape occur posteriorly on the lateral and posterior slopes. Their spacing is not clearly evident, but does not appear to be uniform. The anterior markings and those on the lateral slopes may not necessarily have had the same function. No satisfactory interpretation of these markings can be given. Whatever they may be, they are not the same as the ‘“‘shadow scars” in Arch- aeophiala Perner (Knight, 1952, p. 27), as these “sears”? would be represented on the steinkern by ridges rather than depressions and would be in a different position with reference to the muscles. Locality —U.8.G.8. locality 237y (green), Cambrian-Ordovician register. On Poverty Flat, NW!14NE24 sec. 31, T. 37 N., R. 1 W., Washing- ton County, Mo. The Poverty Flat lead workings were mined in 1890-1891. Mr. Koenig indicates that they are on the northwest of a dirt road, just south of a sharp bend, clearly shown on the Berryman, Missouri, quadrangle sheet. The specimens were collected by J. D. Robertson, of the Missouri Geological Survey, in 1890 or earlier. The register, written June 3, 1933, or later lists the specimens as being from the Gas- conade dolomite. Catalogued specumens.—U.S.N.M. no. 135184; paratypes U.S.N.M. nos. 135185 a, 135185 b. REFERENCES ForerstEe, A. F. Notes on the Agelacrinidae and Lepadocystinae, with descriptions of Thresher- adicus and Brockocystites. Bull. Sei. Lab. Denison Univ. 17: 399-487, 1914. Haut, James. Natural history of New York, Paleontology, 5 (2): Containing descriptions of the Gasteropoda, Pteropoda, and Cephalopoda of the Upper Helderberg, Hamilton, Portage, and Chemung growps. 1879. Knieut, J. Brookes. Paleozoic gastropod geno types. Geol. Soc. Amer. Spec. Pap. 32: 510 pp. 1941. Paleozoic Gastropoda. In Shimer, H. W., and R. R. Shrock, Jndex fossils of North America: 437-479, pls. 174-196. New York, 1944. gastropods and their Smith- Primitive fossil bearing on gastropod classification. sonian Miss Coll. 117 (13): 56 pp. 1952 Kosayasui, Treticsut. Faunal study of the Wa th snecia wanian (basal Ordovician) series wii 14 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES notes on the Ribeiridae and the ellesmereocer- oids. Journ. Fac. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo, sec. 2, 3: 249-328, pls. 1-10. 1933. KoxrEn, Ernst (edited by Perner, Jaroslav). Die Gastropoden des baltischen Untersilurs. Mém. Acad. Sei. Russie, sér. 8: Classe Phys.- Math., 37 (1). 1925. LemcHe, HENNING. A new living deep-sea mollusc of the Cambro-Devonian class Monoplacophora. Nature 179: 413-416, 1957. Lestey, J. P. A dictionary of the fossils of Penn- sylvania and neighboring States named in the reports and catalogues of the Survey. Geol. Surv. Pennsylvania, Report P, 4: i-xlv, 437, i-xxx1 pp. 1889. LinpstroM, Gustar. On the Silurian Gastro- poda and Pteropoda of Gotland. Wongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl. 19 (6). 1884. Rasetti, Franco. Internal shell structures in the Middle Cambrian gastropod Scenella and the problematic genus Stenothecoides. Journ. Pal. 28: 59-66, pls. 11, 12. 1954. Unricy, E. O., and ScorieLp, W. H. The Lower vou. 48, No. 1 Silurian Gastropoda of Minnesota, in Geology of Minnesota, Final Report, 3 (pt. 2): 813-1081, pl. 61-82. 1897. Watcotr, C. D. Description of new species of fossils from the Calciferous formation. 32d Ann. Rep. New York State Mus. Nat. Hist.: 129- IBIS WS7O- Cambrian geology and paleontology. IT, No. 9, New York Potsdam-Hoyt fauna. Smith- sonian Misc. Coll. 57: 252-294, pls. 41-44. 1912. Wenz, W. Ursprung und frihe Stammes-geschichte der Gastropoden. Arch. Molluskunde 72: 1-10. 1940. WHITFIELD, R. P. Preliminary descriptions of new species of fossils from the lower geological formations of Wisconsin. Ann. Rep. Wisconsin Geol. Surv. 1877: 50-89, 1879. Observations on some imperfectly known fossils from the Calciferous sandstone of Lake Champlain, and descriptions of several new forms. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 2: 41-63, 1889. POST-SHOT YIELD MEASUREMENT OF AEC UNDERGROUND NUCLEAR TEST The Atomic Energy Commission has reported the resultant yield of the deep underground nuclear test conducted at the AEC Nevada Test Site in September 1957 as 1.7 kilotons. The shot was detonated at 09 hours 59 minutes 59.45 seconds Pacific Daylight Time (16:59 :59.45 GCT) on September 19, 1957, at the end of a tunnel about 2,000 feet long dug horizontally into the side of a mesa at the northern edge of the Yucca Basin. The explosion took place in a layer of voleanic tuff. The coordinates of the detona- tion point are: latitude 37°11’44.8”, longitude 116°12/11.3”, elevation 6,615 feet above mean sea level. The vertica! distance from the detona- tion point to the mesa surface is 899 feet, and the slant distance to the side of the mesa is approximately 800 feet. | Post-shot investigation of the tunnel and sur- rounding area confirms that the explosion was contained and that no radioactive materials escaped into the surrounding air. A detailed study of the area and the local effects of the detonation is In progress. JANUARY 1958 BRONNIMANN AND BROWN: A CRETACEOUS FORAMINIFERAL GENUS Ly PALEONTOLOGY — Hedbergella, a new name for a Cretaceous planktonic forami- niferal genus. PAUL BRONNIMANN, Esso Standard Oil, 8. A., Habana, anp Nort K. Brown, Jr., Gulf Oil Corporation, New York. (Communicated by H. A. Rehder.) (Received August 21, 1957) The generic name Hedbergina was intro- duced by Brénnimann and Brown (1956, p. 529) for a group of planktonic Foraminifera ranging in age from Aptian or Albian to Cenomanian. Globigerina seminolensis Harl- ton was thought to be representative of this group and was originally designated the type species of Hedbergina. Although Harlton’s figures of the holotype of G. seminolensis (1927, pl. 5, fig. 7a, b) seem to give a true likeness of the group, later examination of this specimen at the U.S. National Museum has shown that it is not typical of the group for which Bronnimann and Brown (idem, pp. 529, 530) intended their name Hed- bergina to represent. The holotype is so un- like Harlton’s deceptive figures that it may not even be the specimen which he originally figured. The holotype does in fact, as noted previously by Plummer (1945, p. 264), re- semble quite closely Globigerina cretacea d’Orbigny. It has a relatively large umbilicus and may have possessed an umbilical cover- plate which was later broken away. Harlton Gdem, p. 25) originally stated that the type locality of G. semznolensis was the Pennsylvanian Glenn formation, about 4 miles north of Ardmore, Carter County, Okla. However, Tomlinson (1929, p. 78) questioned the correctness of this and other localities supplied by Harlton. Later Harlton (1929, p. 308) admitted these errors but did not completely rectify them. Plummer (idem, p. 264), who examined the holotype of G. seminolensis was of the opinion that it was not ‘fa convincing Pennsylvanian faunal member.”’ Inasmuch as Comanchean (Aptian to Cenomanian) strata crop out in and around the town of Ardmore, Brénnimann and Brown (idem, p. 530) believed Harlton’s species to be a Comanchean form. We now believe, judging from the morphology of the holotype, that G. semanolensis is a younger Cretaceous fossil. In spite of our intention, G. semznolensis, represented by its holotype as this specimen is now known to be, was originally, though inadvertently, designated the type species of Hedbergina; and for this reason the designa- tion is binding and must be followed. Al- though our definition of Hedbergina is now known not to refer to Hedbergina, it still applies to the group of fossils for which that name was unfortunately introduced, and for which we now propose the new name Hed- bergella. The definition of Hedbergella, nu. name, which is the same as that previously given by Brénnimann and Brown (idem, p. 029) for Hedbergina, is as follows: The smooth- to rough-walled, calcareous hyaline test is trochospirally coiled. Its small early chambers are globular, inflated, and glo- bigerine-like. The last few chambers are elongated and extend into a relatively small umbilicus. The aperture is rounded, interiomarginal, and opens into the umbilicus. Short apertural flaps extend ‘into the umbilicus but do not form an umbilicai cover-plate. Remarks.—The most characteristic feature of Hedbergella, n. name, is the extension of the last few chambers into the umbilicus. This represents a stage in the phylogeny from a Globigerina-like form with a tight umbilicus to T7cinella Reichel with a large umbilicus and umbilical cover-plate. In this lineage the enlarging umbilicus was at first minimized by extension of the last few cham- bers as a whole into it as represented by Hedbergella. Later in the lineage the umbili- cus became too large to be filled in by the chambers themselves. However, by extend- ing only the apertural flaps, and not the chambers as a whole, the large umbilicus was covered by an umbilical cover-plate com- posed of extended apertural flaps as repre- sented by Tvcinella. Reichel (1950, pp. 601-603), Hagn (1952, pp. 769, 770; 1955, pl. 22, fig. 2, pl. 23, fig. 1), and: Wmuiker (1952, pl. 5, ne. 2, Pv; pl. 6, fig. 3, Pv) have referred forms belonging to Hedbergella, n. name, to the genus Pseudo- valvulinerra Brotzen (type species: Rosalzna lorneiana d’Orbigny), but Hedbergella, n. name, differs from this genus 1n possessing early globigerine-like chambers and a rounded aperture. 16 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 1 Globigerina infracretacea Glaessner seems to belong to the genus Hedbergella, but this 1s not easily ascertained since Glaessner (1937, p. 28, text-fig. 1) only figured dorsal and peripheral views of his species. However, Subbotina (1953, pl. 1, figs. 5-10) has presented excellent figures of specimens of G. infracretacea. In the ventral views of her figures the chambers themselves are seen to extend into the umbilicus, thus indicating that G. infracretacea should be allocated to Hedbergella. “Anomalina sp. aff. lorneyana (d’Orb.) typ.”’ of Montanaro Gallitelli (1947, p. 194, text-fig. 1, no. 18a, b) is either a Hedbergella or Ticinella, but one cannot tell which since she did not figure a ventral view. The type species of Hedbergella, n. name, is here designated Anomalina lorneiana var. trocoidea Gandolfi. This form is raised to the rank of species and described below as Hed- bergella trocoidea (Gandolfi). Hedbergella trocoidea (Gandolfi) Iie, 1 Be Anomalina lorneiana (not d’Orbigny) GaANn- DOLFI, Riv. Ital. Paleont., anno 48, mem. AB To), OS, ol, 4ey mast, I IDS Toll (ey, 1s, 4S (Ole lls}, figs. la, b, 4a, b. Anomalina lorneiana var. trocoidea GaAn- Xoo, Woke, 1d. OY), ol, Ho uote. le-@s jo 4s fies, 4, Be yolwls. wes, 22h, 10; Be, |0, Anomalina lorneiana d’Orb. var. trocoidea Gandolfi, Noru, Geol. Bundesanstalt, Jahrb., Sonderbd. 3: 80, pl. 4, figs. 27a, b, 28a, b. Pseudovalvulineria sp., UMIKER, Univ. Bern, Geolw Insts Dissh plone 2 (ev) Eales, ne. DPW) Pseudovalvulineria trocoidea (Gandolfi), Haen, Erdol und Kohle 5: text-figs. 1 (part), 2 (part). _ Pseudovalvulineria trocoidea (Gandolfi), HacGn, Internat. Sedimentary Petrogr. Sensis ple 225) tig. 2a (pany) sa plepZonmicerg! (part). Hedbergina seminolensis (not Harlton), BRONNIMANN and Brown, Eclogae geol. Helv. 48: 592, pl. 20, figs. 4-6. Not Globigerina seminolensis HARLTON, Jiourns (alah 24 len, omar 1942. 1942. 1951. 1952. 1952. 1956. 1927, Description.—The rather rough-walled, coarsely granular test is low to relatively high trochospirally coiled. Its early chambers are small and globigerine-like. The last whorl is composed of six to eight chambers, the last one or two of which are markedly elongated and extended into a tight umbilicus. The interiomarginal aperture is rounded and opens into the umbilicus. It is bordered by a short apertural flap —Broénnimann and Brown’s (idem, p. 529) description of Hed- bergina seminolensis (not Harlton). Tse: Fig. 1.—Hedbergella trocoidea (Gandolfi). Lec- totype of Anomalina lorneiana var. trocoidea Gandolfi. a, dorsal view; 6, peripheral view; c, ventral view. X50. After Gandolfi (1942, pl. 2, — fig. la-c). Remarks. — Anomalina lornerana (not d’Orbigny) of Gandolfi (1942, p. 98, pl. 4, figs. 1, 19; pl. 8, fig. 2; pl. 13, figs. la, b, 4a, b) is a low-spired form, and A. lornezana var. trocoidea Gandolfi is a high-spired form. Such forms seem to represent extremes in the variability of the species. Both forms are included in the same species herein called Hedbergella trocoidea (Gandolfi). Globsgerina infracretacea Glaessner can probably be re- ferred to Hedbergella, but it is smaller, though relatively stouter, its walls are smoother, and it possesses fewer chambers in the last whorl than H. trocoidea. Placentula nitida (not Reuss) of Berthelin (1880, p. 69, pl. 27, 4, fig. 1la—c) from the Albian of Montcley, Department of Doubs, France, appears to be a similar form, as noted by Gandolfi (idem, p. 99). However, Barten- stein (1954, p. 49), who restudied the Montcley material, places Berthelin’s form in synonymy with Valvulineria parva Khan, which is unlike any Hedbergella. Discorbina galiciana Friedberg, originally described from beds of supposedly Senonian age near Lwéw JANUARY 1958 (Lemberg) in the Ukraine (formerly south- eastern Poland), may also represent a Hed- bergella. In raising the rank of this form from variety to species, we have retained Gan- dolfi’s varietal name as the specific name. In Gandolfi’s paper the spelling of this name where printer’s type was used is “‘trocoidea”’ (idem, p. 99, explanations to pls. 2, 13). His spelling of the name where drafted letters were used is ‘‘trochoidea’’ (idem, text-fig. 49, pl. 4). Although “‘trocoidea’”’ is probably the intended spelling, this is not certain. Ac- cording to the Copenhagen Decisions on Zoological Nomenclature (Hemming, ed., 1953, pp. 43-44), ‘“‘Where there was more than one Original Spelling and in the case of none of these spellings was there clear evi- dence that it was the result of an inadvertent error, the Valid Original Spelling is that one of the Original Spellings used by the First Subsequent User of the name.” Reichel (idem, pp. 601, 603) appears to have been the first user (other than nomenclators, e.g., the Zoological Record, Thalmann’s Indexes to new genera, species and varieties of Foraminifera, and Ellis and Messina’s Catalogue of Foram- inifera) of Gandolfi’s name, but he also used the two spellings. Noth (1951, p. 80) was the next user of Gandolfi’s name which he spelled ‘“‘trocoidea.’”? We regard Noth’s usage as the valid spelling. No holotype of Anomalina lorneiana var. trocoidea was originally designated or indi- cated by Gandolfi. The specimen Gandolfi (idem, pl. 2, fig. la—c) illustrated as ‘‘A noma- lina lorneiana d’Orbigny trocoidea n. var. Breggia, strato 14, 50.” is herein desig- nated lectotype. Gandolfi’s original figure of this specimen is reproduced here as Fig. OmC. The lectotype of ‘‘Anomalina lorneiana var. trocoidea Gandolfi” is deposited in the collections of the Institute of Geology and Paleontology, University of Basel, Switzer- land. The type locality of Hedbergella trocoidea (Gandolfi) is the lower part of the Scaglia variegata (Aptian or Albian), bed 14, about 35 m above the top of the Barremian Bian- cone limestone, in the gorge of Breggia River, northeast of Balerna, near Chiasso, Canton Ticino, southeastern Switzerland. BRONNIMANN AND BROWN: A CRETACEOUS FORAMINIFERAL GENUS 177 REFERENCES BARTENSTEIN, H. Revision von Berthelin’s Mém- ore 1880 wiber die Alb-Foraminiferen von Montcley. Senck. Leth. 35 (1/2): 37-50, pl. 1. 1954. BerRTHELIN, G. Mémoire sur les foraminiferes fossiles de étage Albien de Montcley (Doubs). Mém. Soc. Géol. France (3) 1 (5): 1-87, pls. 24-27. 1880. BRONNIMANN, P., and Brown, N. K., Jr. Taz- onomy of the Globotruncanidae. Eclogae Geol. Helv. 48 (2): 503-562, pls. 20-24, 24 figs. 1956. GuAESSNER, M. F. Planktonforaminiferen aus der Kreide und dem Eozdn und thre stratigraph- ische Bedeutung. Univ. Moscow Paleont. Lab. Stud. Micropaleontology, 1 (1): 27-52, 1 pl., 4 text-figs. 1937. Haan, H. Zur Altersfrage der bunten ‘““Neocommer- gel” im Hurschbachtobel bei Hindelang (AII- gau). Erd6l und Kohle 5: 768-770, 2 figs. 1952. ———. Fazies und Mikrofauna der Gesteine der Bayerischen Alpen. Internat. Sedimentary Petrogr. Ser. 1: xi + 174 pp., 71 pls., 8 tables. E. J. Brill, Leiden, 1955. Harton, B. H. Some Pennsylvanian Foraminifera from the Glenn formation of southern Oklahoma. Journ. Pal. 1: 15-27, pls. 1-5. 1927. ———. Some Pennsylvanian Ostracoda and For- aminifera from southern Oklahoma— a correc- tion. Journ. Pal. 3: 308. 1929. Hemminea, F. (editor) (1953) Copenhagen Deci- sions on Zoological Nomenclature, 14th In- ternat. Congress of Zoology, Colloquium Zool. Nomenclature, xxix + 135 pp. Montanaro GALLITELLI, EH. Per la geologia delle argille ofiolitifere appenniniche. Nota III.— Foraminifert dell’argilla scagliosa di Castel- vecchio (Modena). Mem. Atti Soc. Toscana Sci. Nat. 54: 175-196, 2 text-figs. 1947. Notu, R. Foraminiferen aus Unter-.und Ober- kreide des ésterreichischen Anteils an Flysch, Helvetikum und Vorlandvorkommen. Geol. Bundesanst. Jahrb. 3: 91 pp., 9 pls., 2 tables. 1951. PuumMER, H. J. Smaller Foraminifera in the Mar- ble Falls, Smithwick, and lower Strawn strata around the Llano uplift in Texas. Univ. Texas Publ. 4401 : 209-271, 3 pls., 16 text-figs. 1945. REIcHEL, M. Observations sur les Globotruncana du gisement de la Breggia (Tessin). Eclogae Geol. Helv. 42 (2): 596-617, pls. 16, 17, 6 text-figs. 1950. SuBBoTINA, N. N. Fossil Foraminifera from the U.S.S.R., Globigerinidae, Hantkeninidae a Globorotaliidae. Trudy Vses. Neft. geol.-rav Inst. [n. ser.], fase. 76: 295 pp., 44 pls., 8 text- figs. [In Russian]. 1953. Tomurnson, C. W. The Pennsylvanian system % the Ardmore Basin. Oklahoma Geol. Surv Bull. 46: 79 pp., 20 pls., 3 text-figs. 1929. UmIKER, R. Geologie der westlichen Stockhornkette (Berner Oberland) mit besonderer Bericksic/ tigung der Kreidestratigraphie. Univ. Bern Geol. Inst. Publ., Dissertation: x + 77 pp., 8 pls., 12 text-figs. 1952. 18 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 1 ENTOMOLOGY.—Venomous moths and butterflies. Howarp F. ALLARD and Harry A. Auzarp, Tingo Maria, Peru. (Received September 24, 1957) LARVAE WITH VENOMOUS HAIRS OR SETAE The larvae of a number of species ot moths and butterflies are known to bear venomous hairs or setae. The following may be mentioned: Lagoa rispata (fam. Megalopygidae). This is a common eastern species, the caterpil- lars feeding upon the leaves of oak, elm, apple, raspberry, and various shrubs. These are fleshy and furnished with a dense coat of long, silky, brown hairs which project upward and meet to form a ridge or crest along the median dorsal line. Among these fine hairs venomous setae occur. Sabine stimulea (fam. Limacodidae, by some authors termed the Cochlidiidae and by others the Eucleidae). These are known as the slug-caterpillar moths. Sabine stemu- lea is the saddle-back caterpillar, feeding on oaks and other forest trees. The larva is characterized by a green patch on the back resembling a saddlecloth, the saddle being represented by an oval purplish brown sopt. The moth is dark reddish brown in color with two white dots near the apex of the fore wings. The spiny oak slug (Luclea delphiniat) is another common species feeding on oak, pear, willow, and other trees. Automeris io (fam. Saturniidae) (Giant silkworms). This is called the io-moth and is a common species in the eastern part of the United States. It is characterized by large conspicuous eye spots on the hind wings. The larvae, armed with particularly yenomous spines arranged in tufts, are ereen, with a broad brown or reddish-white edged stripe on either side of the abdomen, and the spines are tipped with black. This is a common species, and the junior author, in his boyhood, was well acquainted with this caterpillar and often deliberately touched the spines of the caterpillars against the tender skin of the arms or fingers to note the venomous reactions. Fre- quently, too, he sometimes inadvertently came in contact with them, usually while cutting or shocking corn, and was at once made aware of their presence by a burning sensation followed by more or less tempo- rary redness or swelling. The maia-moth, Hemileuca maa, is also a member of the same family Saturnudae. It is the only species of the genus in the eastern United States and is not particu- larly common. The larvae feed upon the leaves of the oak, are brownish black with a lateral yellow stripe, and each segment is armed with large, branching, venomous spines. eae ae Browntail moth, Huproctis chrysorrhoea (fam. Lymantriidae, or Lipariidae). The tussock moths. This is a European pest in- troduced first into Massachusetts at some unknown date, but in 1897 its ravages came to notice, and the species since has spread over much of New England, and into Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, and other areas. The larvae are more or less social in behavy- ior, fastening leaves together with silk as shelters in which they pass the winter. They are nearly black in general coloration, and are clothed with brownish, barbed hairs, borne on the subdorsal and lateral tubercles. These hairs are venomous and in contact with the human skin, produce an inflamma- tion similar to that of poison ivy. Even the cast spines of the larvae are readily blown about by the wind, the venomous hairs causing much discomfort. ADULT INSECTS WITH VENOMOUS HAIRS OR SETAE It is perhaps less generally known that the hairs or setae of the adult moths and butterflies, in some parts of the world, may also produce great discomfort, as trouble- some irritations or inflammation in contact with the skin of tender areas of the human body. In this country the hairs of the adult insects of the browntail moth are known to be of this character. In some parts of the world, especially in January 1958 the warmer regions of South America, the presence of moths with venomous hairs may at times constitute a serious health problem. The following observations and account of the senior author, living at Tingo Maria, Peru, in the province of Huanaco, on the east slope of the Andes, in the tropical rain- forest, may be of some interest to entomolo- gists and to the medical fraternity as well. In the Tingo Maria area, in 1952, during the latter part of April and the month of May, near the close of the season of heavy rains, great numbers of small, dusty black moths made their appearance, congregating about electric lights along the streets of Tingo Maria, and around those over the entrance of houses. In unscreened houses where lights were present these moths were attracted in numbers. These moths at Tingo Maria appear at about the same season every year, and in 1952, they became exceptionally numerous, together with a number of other species, but the dusty black species were dominant, appearing in enor- mous numbers. It was soon obvious that the irritations which soon developed were associated with this moth. Simultaneously with these hordes many people experienced a troublesome rash. Spotted red areas or small pimples or streaks developed on the inner angle of the forearm. Irritations also appeared on the neck or on other tender parts of the body. So general was the afflic- tion that affected individuals visited the hospital at Tingo Maria, thinking they were affected with some new, strange tropical disease. It is estimated that 70-80 per cent of the population was affected, perhaps as many as several thousand people. The senior writer suspected that the hairs of this ubiquitous moth were responsible for this rash and carried out a few texts which definitely proved that his surmise was cor- rect. He caught several of the moths and gently rubbed them up and down the inner part of his own forearm and also made simi- lar tests upon several Peruvian technicians at the Experimental Station who had not previously experienced the prevailing rash. In about 15-20 minutes all who had _ sub- mitted to the test had broken out with a red, itching rash in the treated areas. Both the senior writer’s garage and house at ALLARD AND ALLARD: VENOMOUS MOTHS AND BUTTERFLIES 19 Tingo Maria were equipped with an electric light over the entrance doors. Every night hundreds of these moths were attracted to these lights. This moth has an interesting behavior by playing possum when touched, at once lift- ing and closing its wings in an upright position over the body, then usually relax- ing its hold upon the object to which it is clinging and simply falling to the ground as if helpless or dead. In a few seconds or a minute it appears to revive and crawl or fly away. Although the great swarm of these moths appear in April and May, a few belated individuals may be seen in June, but very few in numbers in comparison with the great initial invasion. The day following their nightly appear- ance, they remain around the light which attracted them, but many fall to the ground and appear to die and are carried away or eaten by ants. Their constant fluttering about the lights scatters great quantities of the hairlike fuzz dislodged from their bodies, and this forms a dense covering on all ob- jects below or near the lights, and is blown about. This at once explained the occurrence of the rash each time the senior author worked in his workship in the garage, when- ever he paused and rested his forearm on the work bench. On these occasions, always in a short time, the rash made its appear- ance, and the itching continued for several hours or more. At the height of the invasion of these moths, people were being constantly re-exposed each night so that the rash was aggravated into an almost chronic and dis- tressing condition to be endured for several weeks. Specimens of this moth, collected by the authors, have been kindly identified by Wilham D. Field, associate curator of in- sects, U. 8. National Museum, as a species of Hylesia close to Hylesia volvex Dyar, of the lepidopterous subfamily Hemileucinae, family Saturnudae. According to Mr. Field this troublesome genus presents great taxo- nomic difficulties so that the Tingo Maria species cannot at present be more definitely named, than a species near Hylesia vole Dyar. Mr. Field has been of much assist- ance in the preparation of relevant litera- 20 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ture discussing the moths of the genus Hylesia, and the skin irritations which they induce. TESTS OF THE JUNIOR AUTHOR Early in July the senior writer (my son) sent me six or seven dried specimens of this moth, and I made the following tests. I carefully rubbed the abdominal portion of a dry moth, bearinga coat of velvety dark hairs, on the skin of the bend of my forearm at or little below the elbow. This was done at 2 p.m. July 17. There was no noticeable im- mediate effect, but in about two hours, the area, showed a noticeable redness and by nightfall the skin was hot and fiery red with a pronounced puffiness resembling weals, and itching had become intense. This dis- comfort persisted throughout the might. Even at nightfall of the next night, July 18, the redness, puffiness, and itching were very pronounced. By nightfall ot dalky WO. 2: marked fiery redness was still evident, and tiny pimplelike blisters had appeared, with blood-red dots as if a slight haemorrhage had taken place at many pin-point spots. There was marked hyperaemia in the area, and the affected skin seemed hot and fever- ish, and appeared to perspire more freely than unaffected areas. I purposely avoided any palliative treat- ment or medication with alcohol or other reagents, as I wished to learn how persist- ent this trouble would be. There was still some redness of my forearm on July 22, but there was now little swelling, and with only occasional periods of itching, and this became most noticeable only following work or exercise during periods of hot weather. By July 24, all irritating symp- toms resulting from the test had completely subsided. The irritations induced had there- fore lasted almost one week, or at least for six days, although some redness remained for a few days longer. In the literature there are a number of reports of skin irritations produced by species of moths of the genus Hylesza. In the Lima newspaper La Cronica, May 12, 1952, the following translated account appeared. Montevideo, 12 (U/P/)—The crew of the Italian oil-tanker Unitas who were detained in VOL. 48, No. 1 quarantine some days after arriving from Carit- pito, Venezuela, due to a fear of an epidemic of a dangerous tropical disease, stated that while tak- ing on oil in Venezuela, actual clouds of yellow- tailed butterflies alighted on the hands, faces and other exposed parts of the officers and sailors, which they crushed with their hands or other objects. A few hours before the ship weighed anchor, the crew showed symptoms of a curious disease. The skin was irritated first, followed later by a painful inflammation. The captain, Romulo Ballestrino, radioed the Institute of Tropical Diseases in Rome, where a correct diag- nosis was made and an efficient remedy pre- scribed. If this account is correct in all its fea- tures, it isevident that even certain swallow- tail butterflies of the genus Papilio may cause troublesome skin inflammations simi- lar to that caused by the moths of the genus Hylesia, but this needs further confirma- tion. Little work appears to have been done to determine the exact nature of the skin irritations produced by the hairy covering of the moths of the genus Hylesza. Mr. Leger and P. Mouzels (see reference 4) appear to have made a more than cursory study of the character of the irritations pro- duced. They examined microscopically the indi- vidual hairs or setae of the body covering of the moths of Hylesia, a species appear- ing at Cayenne in French Guiana in July and August at the close of the rainy season, causing skin eruptions, watery blisters and inflammation, especially in young children. The natives are familiar with its cause, ascribing it to Mauvais papillons. The trouble occurs only during a short period when certain moths of the genus Hylesia appear, and usually persists for only about eight days. They examined microscopically the hairs and setae of the body covering of these moths and found three sorts. Most of these were 140-150 microns long with the largest diameter of 3 microns. These apically were sharp-pointed, and some were furnished with downwardly directed barbs. Others were larger, up to 300 microns long, and less sharply pointed. Some are lance-shaped, shaped something like a knife. Some are plates 2 microns thick with a length 120-150 microns. Leger and Mouzels very convincingly proved that the irritations produced by the JANUARY 1958 hairs of these moths were not of merely mechanical origin. After macerating the moths, some in alcohol, and some in water, these two solutions were centrifuged to eliminate all scales and hairs. The solutions were now separately tested on the tender skin. The alcohol solution was absolutely without effect. The water solution, after 4 hours, produced the typical characteristic iritations of Hylesta, which persisted for four to five days. This simple test indicated an irritating principle of chemical origin, comparable, it would appear, to the contact poisons of the sap of certain plants (Rhus). In the June 1952 issue of the publication The Lamp (7), there appeared a most in- teresting account of insufferable irritations that workers on oil tankers visiting northern South America have experienced following visitations of the moths Hylesia. An artist’s concept of swarms of these moths visiting one of these tankers attracted by the lights on board, is presented in an illustration. This is a most readable and popular account of the annoyances swarms of these venom- ous moths sometimes inflict upon the crews with their venomous hairs. ALLARD AND ALLARD: VENOMOUS MOTHS AND BUTTERFLIES 7) BIBLIOGRAPHY (1) Dauuas, E. D. Otro caso de dermatitis pro- ducida por un lepidoptera y nota sobre Hy- lesia nigricans Berg (Lep. Bombycidae). 8a Reun. Soc. Arg. Pat. Reg.: 469-474. 1933. (2) Fiocu, H, H.S. E. ABonnenc. Sur la papil- lonite guyanaise. Discription du papillon pathogene Hylesia urticans. Inst. Pasteur Guyane Franc. Territ. de |’Inini, Publ. 89: 10; 5 figs. 1944. (3) JoprG, M. E. Nota previa sobre el principio activo urticante de Hylesia nigricans (Lepz- dopt. Hemileucidae) y las dermitis provo- cadas por el mismo. 8a Reun. Sog. Arg. Pathol. Reg.: 842-895, 1933. (4) Lecer, M., ann P. Movuzeus. Dermatose prurigineuse determinee par des papillons saturnides du genre Hylesia. Bull. Soe. Path. Exot. 11: 104-107. 1918. (5) Lima, A. pa Costa. Insectos de Brasil 5: 118-120 (Lagartas urticantes). 1945; 6: 264— 265 (discussion on Hylesia), 1950. (6) TissEuiIL, J. Contribution a Vlétude papillonite guyanaise. Bull. Soe. Exot. 28: 719-721, 1935. (7) ANON. Beware butterflies. The Lamp (2) 20- 21. June 1952. [An excellent and vivid ac- count of violent skin irritations induced upon the exposed skin of workers on oil tankers of the Standard Oil Co. (New Jersey) in the Gulf of Paria, northern South America. | de la Path. THE STATUE OF NEWTON AT CAMBRIDGE Newton with his prism and silent face, The marble index of a mind for ever Voyaging through strange seas of Thought, alone. —W ORDSWORTH. 22 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES voL. 48, No. 1 ENTOMOLOGY.—A recharacterization of the genus Coelopencyrtus, with descrip- tions of two new species (Hymenoptera: Encyrtidae). B. D. Burks, Entomology Research Division, U. 8. Department of Agriculture. (Communicated by C. F. W. Muesebeck.) (Received September 9, 1957) In 1919 Timberlake (Proc. Hawaiian Ent. Soc. 4: 218-225) described two genera of En- cyrtidae for species which are parasitic on the mature larvae of aculeate Hymenoptera in Hawaii. Coelopencyrtus was described for odyneri Timberlake and swezeyz Timberlake, both reared from the mature larvae of the vespid wasp Odynerus nigripennis (Holm- gren), and Nesencyrtus was described for Adelencyrtus kaalae Ashmead, reared from the mature larvae of the colletid bee Neso- prosopis pubescens Perkins. Coelopencyrtus was characterized as having the female antenna with the basal funicle segments at least as long as broad, the funicle considerably longer than the club, the club itself not greatly wider than the funicle, the mouth opening not greatly widened, the thorax elevated, and the ovi- positor not exserted; the male had simple antennae and the head had the frons pro- tuberantly produced beyond the eyes. Vesen- cyrtus, contrariwise, had the female antennal funicle with all segments broader than long, the club almost as long as the entire funicle and much broader than it, the mouth open- ing very broad to accommodate the unusu- ally large mandibles, the thorax somewhat depressed, and the ovipositor slightly ex- serted; the male had ramose antennae and the frons was not protuberantly produced beyond the eyes. Shortly after his 1919 paper, Timberlake described two more species of Coelopencyr- tus. C. orbi (1920, Proc. Hawaiian Ent. Soc. 4: 422) was a parasite of the mature larvae of Odynerus orbus Perkins, and mauzensis (1922, ibid. 5: 137) like odynerz and swezeyt, was a parasite of the mature larvae of Ody- nerus nigripennis (Holmgren). He also de- scribed a second species of Nesencyrtus, sexramosus, from a single unreared male specimen (1922, ibid. 5: 141). All these species are Hawaiian. No additional species in either genus have been described up to now. Recently two species of encyrtid parasites of mature larvae of the solitary colletid bee Hylaeus were reared and submitted to me for identification. One species had been reared in Utah and the other on Plummers Island, Md. It was apparent that these species were undescribed, but their generic assignment presented considerable difficulty. They could not be placed to genus with pub- lished keys, such as those of Ashmead (1904, Mem. Carnegie Mus. 1: 286-311), Mercet (1921, Fauna Ibérica, Himendpteros, fam. Encirtidos, pp. 60-82), Ferriére (1953, Mitt. Schweiz. Ent. Ges. 26: 1-45), or Erdés and Novicky (1955, Beitr. zur Ent. 5: 165-202). In Ashmead or Mercet they ran out near Epiencyrtus, but even a casual examination of these Hylaeus parasites showed them not to be that genus. Consequently a search was made through the numerous described encyrtid genera which are not included in the published keys. Fortunately specimens of many of these genera are in the U. 8. Na- tional Museum collection. A study of these specimens and the literature finally made it clear that the Hylaeus parasites had a blend of the characters of Timberlake’s genera Coelopencyrtus and Nesencyrtus. The males have simple, nonramose antennae, as in Coelopencyrtus, but the heads are nonpro- tuberant, as in Nesencyrtus. The females have the funicle segments all broader than long, the club large and wider than any funicle segments, the thorax depressed, and the ovipositor exserted, as in Nesencyrtus, but the mouth opening is relatively narrow, as in Coelopencyrtus. Under these circumstances it seemed ad- visable to re-study all the species which have been placed in Coelopencyrtus and Nesen- cyrtus, to see how distinct they are generi- cally. A re-examination of Timberlake’s excel- lent descriptions and figures, along with a study of type material of V. kaalae and C. odynert, swezeyi, and orbs in the U. 8. National Museum collection, have led to JANUARY 1958 the conclusion that they all represent a single genus. The rami of the funicle seg- ments of the male antennae are not generi- eally significant, as these vary from six funicular rami in sexramosus, to four in kaalae, to three small rami in mawiensis, to one large ramus in swezey2, to one very small ramus in odynerz, to none in orbz. In orb, however, there is a small, ramuslike projec- tion on the pedicel of the male antenna. Somewhat similar projections are present on the pedicels in swezeyz and mauiensis, while the pedicels are simple or only very slightly modified in sexramosus, kaalae, and odynert. As for the female characters, orbt comes very close to bridging the separation between Coelopencyrtus and Nesencyrtus. C. orbit has all the funicle segments broader than long, the club is three-fourths as long as the entire funicle, the mouth opening is broader than in odyneri, but not so broad as in kaalae, the thorax 1s somewhat depressed, and the ovi- positor is exserted, less so than in kaalae, but much more so than in odynerz. The protuber- ant head, so striking in the male of odynerz, is present in a reduced degree in the males of orbt and mauiensis. Consideration of these facts justifies the conclusion that all the species mentioned above, as well as the two to be described below, belong in one genus, despite the striking differences that exist between some of the species. The name Coelopencyrtus has page priority. It may be mentioned paren- thetically that the genus Giraultella Gahan and Fagan (=Hpaenasomyia Girault 1919, not 1917), parasitic on the larvae of the xylocopid bee, X ylocopa, in Java is probably not the same as Coelopencyrtus although seemingly closely related. Giraultella is very inadequately described, and I have seen no authentic specimens. Its description was published one month after Coelopencyrtus. Genus Coelopencyrtus Timberlake ‘““Ageniaspis sp.,’’ Swezey, 1907, Ent. Bul. Hawai- ian Sugar Planters Assoc. Expt. Sta. 5: 52. Coelopencyrtus Timberlake, 1919, Proc. Hawiian Ent. Soc. 4: 218; Timberlake, 1922, ibid 5: 135. (Type: Coelopencyrtus odyneri Timberlake, by original designation.) Nesencyrtus Timberlake, 1919, Proc. Hawaiian Ent. Soc. 4: 223. (New synonymy.) (Type: Adelencyrtus kaalae Ashmead, by monotypy and original designation.) BURKS: GENUS COELOPENCYRTUS dips, Descriptton—Mandible with three teeth; maxillary palp with four segments, apical one the longest; labial palp with two segments, apical one the shorter; antennae inserted low on frons, near the mouth border, a relatively broad, rounded projection present between antennal bases; antennal scape enlarged, but not lamelli- form; funicle with six segments, most or all of which are wider than long; club clearly 3-seg- mented and large, varying in length from three- quarters as long as to as long as entire funicle, and in width varying from only slightly wider than to greatly wider than broadest funicle seg- ment; width of malar space varying from three- fifths to nine-tenths as great as maximum diameter of a compound eye; fronto-vertex broad, separated from face by a broadly rounded or subacute angle, surface faintly reticulated and lacking alveolar punctures; lateral ocelli almost touching eye margins. Thoracic notum slightly to moderately depressed, mesoscutum and scutel- lum shining, smooth or very minutely and faintly reticulated; axillae almost but not quite meeting on meson; scutellum without a pencil of hairs or lamelliform bristles; brachypterous or apterous forms unknown; wings long, their apices greatly exceeding gaster; submarginal vein of forewing without an apical, triangular enlargement; marginal vein as long as wide, stigmal vein arising from marginal and as long as marginal and postmarginal veins combined; marginal cilia of forewing very short and dense; legs with femora and tibiae flattened, but lateral margins not carinate; mid tibial spur as long as first mid tarsal segment. Propodeum extremely short on meson, spiracles separated from anterior propodeal margin by a space nearly equal to diameter of a spiracle; gaster slightly wider than thorax and varying from three-quarters to nine- tenths as long as thorax; tips of ovipositor sheaths hidden or slightly exserted. Male with antennal pedicel and funicle varying from simple to more or less ramose, club solid; head more or less protu- berantly produced forward beyond eyes dorsally. Members of this genus are parasites of the mature Hymenoptera. The hosts nest in wood (in twigs, abandoned beetle burrows, or in rotten logs), or in clay cells; none has been reared from ground- larvae of nest-building aculeate nesting Aculeata. The host larva becomes greatly distended and filled with cells, much like lepidop- terous larvae parasitized by Copidosoma (se Timberlake, 1919, loc. eit., p. 220). 24 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Coelopencyrtus kaalae (Ashmead), n. comb. Adelencyrtus kaalae Ashmead, 1901, Fauna Hawai- iensis 1, pt. 3: 323. Nesencyrtus kaalae (Ashmead) Timberlake, 1919, Proc. Hawaiian Ent. Soc. 4: 183, 214.—Timber- lake, 1922, ibid. 5: 139. Coelopencyrtus sexramosus (Timberlake), n. comb. Nesencyrtus sexramosus Timberlake, 1922, Proc. Hawaiian Ent. Soc. 5: 141. Coelopencyrtus hylaeoleter, n. sp. Female——Length 1.0-1.25 mm. Head and thorax dark brown to almost black, with a very faint metallic blue luster visible under strong light; antennae dark brown, with apex of pedicel tan; wings hyaline, veins dark brown, forewing with a short, faint, brown streak at base and a small brown stain below marginal vein; legs dark brown, with trochanters, tibial spurs, and basal tarsal segments tan or yellow; gaster brown, with a broad, dark brown stripe across the middle. Mandible, Fig. 3, with dorsal tooth blunt, ventral two teeth acute. Head in anterior aspect broader than long. Antennae inserted low on frons near mouth border; scape, Fig. 2, enlarged in the middle, its maximum width one-third as great as its length; pedicel semiglobose, two-fifths as long as scape; funicle segments all wider than long, first and second segments each slightly longer than third or fourth, fifth and sixth seg- ments longest; club broader than any funicle segment and almost as long as entire funicle. Malar space long, its width three-fifths as great as maximum diameter of compound eye. Surface of fronto-vertex minutely reticulated, mat, clothed with numerous microbristles; eyes bare. Ocelli forming a right angle; lateral ocellus very close to margin of compound eye, length of ocellocular line one-half as great as diameter of lateral ocellus and one-sixth as great as length of postocellar line. Thorax minutely reticulated dorsally, sub- shining, and clothed with microbristles; dorsal surface of thorax flattened, almost plane medially; pronotum narrower than mesonotum; scutellum and mesoscutum equal in length on meson. Forewing greatly exceeding apex of gaster; marginal vein thickened, Fig. 1, equal in length to postmarginal vein and three-fourths as long as stigmal vein; hairless streak narrow; marginal cilia extremely short. Basal tarsal segment of VOL. 48, No. I mid and hind leg as long as tarsal segments 2 and 3 combined, basal fore tarsal segment slightly shorter than segments 2 and 3. Propodeum extremely short on meson, poste- rior and anterior margins almost in contact; propodeal spiracles round, separated from an- terior propodeal margin by a space slightly longer than diameter of a spiracle. Gaster slightly broader and shorter than thorax; cerci located halfway between base and apex of gaster, each cercus bearing two long and one shorter bristles; ovipositor exserted for a distance one-fifth to one-fourth the length of the gaster. Male.—Length 1.0-1.1 mm. Color, sculpture, and pubescence as in female. Antenna with scape one-half as wide as long, pedicel one-half as long as scape and as long as combined first and second funicle segments; third and fourth funicle segments slightly shorter than first or second, fifth and sixth slightly longer; club as long as two apical funicle segments. Thorax as in female. Gaster five-sevenths as long as thorax. Aedeagus normally protruding as far as female Ovipositor is exserted, apex slender and down curved. Type locality —Logan Canyon, Utah. Types —U.S.N.M. no. 63570. Described from 9 female and 4 male specimens, as follows: Type @, allotype ~@, and 7 @ and 2 @& paratypes, Logan Canyon, Utah, April, 1948, reared from mature larvae of Hylaeus sp., G. E. Bohart; 1 @ and 1 @ paratypes, North Logan, Utah, June 4, 1952, reared from mature larvae of Hylaeus sp. occupying old nest of Sceliphron sp., G. E. Bohart and M. D. Levin. All specimens deposited in the U. 8. National Museum collection. Additional, more or less fragmentary, specimens which bear the same data as above are preserved in alcohol and on slides; these specimens are not included in the type series. Coelopencyrtus hylaeoleter agrees with C. orbi Timberlake in having the funicle segments of the female all wider than long, with the club large; the eyes are bare in both species, and in both hylaeoleter and orbi the ocelli form a right angle, the head is wider than long, there is a short, brown streak in the forewing along the posterior margin near the base, and the tip of the ovipositor is exserted. C. hylaeoleter differs from orbit in that the antennal club of the female is almost as long as the funicle in hylaeoleter, while this is only three- JANUARY 1958 BURKS: GENUS fourths as long in orbi; in hylaeoleter the forewing is hyaline basally, with a small, brown-shaded area beneath the marginal vein, but in orbi the forewing is stained brown over the entire basal half, but lacks brown shading below the mar- ginal vein; the apex of the ovipositor in hylaeoleter is exserted for a distance as great as one-fifth to one-fourth the length of the gaster, while in orbt the ovipositor is exserted for a distance only as great as one-tenth the length of the gaster. The male of hylaeoleter is at once distinguished from the male of orbi by its simple, unmodified antennal pedicel; the pedicel in orbit bears a prominent, conical projection laterally. Coelopencyrtus hylaei, n. sp. Female —Length 1.0-1.1 mm. Head, body, and legs entirely black, with only the mid tibial spurs tan or yellow. Head with faint, metallic blue-green or dark purple luster under strong light; mesoscutum faintly metallic blue-green, scutellum nonmetallic. Wings hyaline, venation black; a very faint brown streak present along posterior margin at base of forewing; no dark shading or staining present in basal half or below marginal vein. Head in anterior aspect slightly broader than long. Mandible as in hylaeoleter. Antenna, Fig. 5, very strongly clavate, third and fourth funicle segments extremely short; club as long as funicle and almost twice as wide as sixth funicle segment. Width of malar space two-thirds as great as maximum diameter of eye. Surface of fronto- vertex minutely reticulated, mat; eyes bare. Ocelli forming an angle of approximately 75°; lateral ocellus extremely close to lateral margin of eye, length of ocellocular line one-third as great as diameter of lateral ocellus and one-fifth as great as length of postocellar line. Thorax dorsally minutely reticulated, only very faintly shining, almost mat; microbristles slightly more conspicuous than in hylaeoleter; thorax nor so flat dorsally as in hylaeoleter, the mesoscutum being more nearly arched and the scutellum only very slightly depressed on the meson; mesoscutum slightly longer than scutel- lum at median line. Forewing, Fig. 4, with marginal and stigmal veins relatively shorter than in hylaeoleter and a row of five or six micro- bristles in outer margin of hairless streak; legs as in hylaeoleter. Gaster only very slightly wider than thorax and nine-tenths as long as it; cercias in hylaeoleter. COELOPENCYRTUS 25 ? vA \ N\ Yq \ \ 4 7” eee lies a ‘< A oe re Se S PCa ~~ - = — = 7! 7 Ly Lares Le _ GE _— / ide ce on a a a Pe FF = eis ARE a a i pe , a a a- a EKG SE ETE - aN SE a —— Vee Zits _ See oa eee rare oe ea _ ig Ge ise gu! Fix Le CG GG - a enone wee Fies. 1-5.—Coelopencyrtus hylaeoleter, n. sp., female, Fig. 1, stigmal area of forewing; Fig. 2, an- tenna; Fig. 3, mandible. C. hylaez, n. sp.. female, Fig. 4, stigmal area of forewing; Fig. 5, antenna. Tips of ovipositor sheaths exserted for a distance one-fourth as great as length of gaster. Male—Length 1.0 mm. Antenna with all funicle segments subequal in length; club as long as apical two funicle segments; gaster three- fourths as long as thorax; apex of aedeagus exserted and very slightly down curved. Type locality.—Plummers Island, Md. Types —U.S.N.M. no. 63571. Described from 22 9 and 1 o&@ specimens, as follows: Type ¢, Plummers Island, Md., taken dead from trap nest cell of Hylaeus sp., H-73, 26 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES August 14, 1956, K. V. Krombein; allotype @ and 21 © paratypes, progeny of the type, taken alive from the same Hylaeus cell, August 17, 1956, K. V. Krombein. All specimens deposited in the U. S. National Museum collection. Mr. Krombein informed me that he first observed the original female specimen resting on the inner side of the septum of a Hylaeus cell in a trap nest on July 18, at which time the host egg apparently had not yet hatched. On July 20 the Hylaeus larva was observed to be partly grown and feeding; the chalcid still was resting on the septum. On July 27 the host larva was mature, its food had been consumed, and the chalcid VOL. 48, No. I had moved to the bottom of the cell. On August 14 the chalcid was dead in the cell, and the host larva was greatly distended, its body being completely filled with cells made by the develop- ing chaleids, which were, by this date, darkened pupae. On August 17, the chalcids had emerged and were removed from the Hylaeus cell. There were 25 @ and 1 specimens, 3 2 of which were mutilated in opening the cell. C. hylaei is closely related to hylaeoleter, described above, but can most easily be distin- euished from it by its completely black colora- tion. The antennae, also, are different in the two species, as is shown in Figs. 2 and 5. See STUDY OF FROGFISHES There are fishes that fish with “fishing poles,” use “worms” for bait, can swallow other fishes as large as themselves, change color like chameleons, and inflate themselves a few times their normal size. These strange representatives of the class Pisces include some of the most fantastically hideous creatures in the world. One hardly would people an imaginary malevolent planet with creatures so weird in appearance. These fishes are sparsely scattered through most of the tropical seas. For the most part they are bottom dwellers in relatively shallow inshore waters. Some hide in seaweed. The color of some species changes in accordance with the environ- ment, but this is not universal in the family Antennariidae, or frogfishes, described by Dr. Leonard P. Schultz, Smithsonian Institution curator of fishes, in a U. 8. National Museum publication recently issued. Several hitherto un- known species, including some of the most fan- tastic, from the Museum’s collections were described. There are several genera of ‘‘fish fishermen,” but the family Antennariidae is easily the most fantastic and colorful. Appearance and ways of life differ greatly from one species to another but they all have, in general, certain characters in common. Each has a “fish pole,” of varying length, at the end of its snout. This is a bony elongation of a dorsal spine. At the end of the ‘ole’ are one to three fleshy projections, which look like marine worms and can be made to move like worms. The fish lies motionless on the bottom or in a mass of seaweed. Another fish comes by and starts nibbling at the bait. The frogfish—so-called because of the general resemblance to frogs— just opens its mouth. The inflow of water sweeps the victim into the mouth. It usually happens too quickly for the eye to follow. The mouth can be ereatly expanded, like that of a snake, to swallow a large victim. The frogfish usually walks, rather than swims, Dr. Schultz says. The pectoral fins are modified to constitute legs of a sort. Movement is slow and clumsy. The frogfish way of life does not call for much agility, except with its big mouth. The ability to change color is probably more or less developed in all species of frogfishes, but in some much more than in others. This camouflage renders the creature almost completely invisible in a changing environment. Nearly every species can blow itself up either with air or water— usually with water—to a few times its normal size. This, Dr. Schultz believes, is probably a defense mechanism to terrify possible enemies. One of the new genera described, with the name of Kanazawaichthys (in honor of Mr. Kanazawa of the National Museum staff) has thick bony plates on its head. Dr. Schultz believes that this is a creature of the deep open sea and that the plates serve in some way as a floating mechanism. This family of fishes has been recognized for two centuries or more, but considerable confusion has existed among ichthyologists because of the secrecy of its ways of life. There are probably many species still unknown, says Dr. Schultz since the creatures are likely to be turned up mostly by accident. ENTOMOLOGY —A new species of Meropleon Dyar from South Carolina (Lepi- doptera: Noctuidae). EK. L. Topp, Entomology Research Division, U. 8. De- partment of Agriculture. (Communicated by A. B. Gurney.) Two male specimens of a new species of Meropleon Dyar were recently discovered among specimens submitted for identification by Frances McAlister of Clemson Agricultural College, Clemson, 8. C. The species is named and described as follows: Meropleon titan, n. sp. Proboscis somewhat abortive, coiled, well hidden by the labial palpi; palpi slightly up- turned, reaching to about the middle of front, ventral margin of first and second segments fringed with loose hairlike scales, third segment small, clothed with appressed scales; front smooth, only slightly produced; eyes large, rounded; ocelli present, small; antennae bipec- tinate, gradually becoming simple at about apical one-fifth, the pectinations short, the pectinations of the inner margin longer than those of the ex- ternal margin. Tegulae with outer margin clothed with black hairlike scales, a median spot of black- tipped scales at apical one-fourth. Vestiture of thorax mostly of long scales, many black-tipped, some tufts of long hairlike scales from above bases of hind wings. Abdomen rubbed (other species of the genus have a series of dorsal crests near the base). Forewing broad, triangular, apex slightly rounded, outer margin weakly angulate at Cu, ; R; from near middle of cell, R3 from Ry» anastomosing with R.,; to form areole; Rs and R, shortly stalked; M, from lower margin of areole; Ms, M3 and Cu, from near lower angle of cell, M. converging toward M; basally; Cu, from apical one-fourth of cell; upper discocellular absent. Hind wings with Sec°+ R, adnate with cell near base; Rs and M;, shortly stalked from upper angle of cell; M, obsolescent, from well above lower angle of cell; M; and Cu; connate at lower angle of cell. Forewing cinereous with rufous and fuscous sealing in the basal, medial and subterminal area; subbasal line represented by a short black mark at costa; antemedial band indistinct except between anal vein and inner margin; postmedial band vague, limited basally and distally by a series of patches of dark scales between the veins, the median portion cinereous except between Cuy and the anal vein where it is white; subterminal line irregular, pale, bordered inwardly by some rufous spots, those nearer the inner margin the most heavily marked; terminal line of weak black erescents; fringe of dark-tipped scales, but narrowly white at veins; a dark, triangular spot extending inwardly from termen in area of the branches of the medial vein and another dark patch on the costa shortly basad of apex; reni- 24 form moderate, vague, mostly of pale, cinereous scales; orbicular large, oblique, outlined with black except open toward costa, central portion white; the area between the reniform and _ or- bicular black; a black basal dash present, extend- ing to antemedial band, followed distally by a heavy, black median bar. Hind wing lightly Fre. 1.—Type, male, Meropleon titan, n. sp. (1.5 X natural size.) suffused with fuscous; terminal line black; fringe of dark-tipped scales, but paler than fringe of forewing. Undersurface of forewing dark grey, cell appearing darker due to a patch of dark hairs. Hind wing below, whitish, weakly flecked with fuscous scales; a moderate, black discal spot present. Length of forewing, 19 mm. Male genitalia similar to those of Meropleon diversicolor (Morrison) but larger and aedeagus distinct. Aedeagus with two spatulate lobes from the aedeagal shaft and a third lobe on the vesica (see Fig. 2). In diversicolor the aedeagus has but one external spatulate lobe. Fig. 2.—Lateral view of aedeagus of Merepleor titan, n. sp. (13.5 X natural size. Type, male, Clemson, 8. C., October 7, 1956, Frances McAlister, in the U. 8. National Mu- seum, Washington, D. C. Type number 63458. One male paratype, Clemson, 8. C., 19, 1957, Frances McAlister in the collection of the Department of Entomology, Clemson Agri- eultural College, Clemson, 8. C. This species is obviously related to J. color (Morr.) but is readily separated by larger size, the presence of a black basal dash nn the anal fold of the forewing, the asymmetrical! bipectinate antennae of the male and the dis- tinctive aedeagus of the male. September Vv 28 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES voL. 48, No. I HERPETOLOGY —Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, No. 17: Southeastern herptiles with northern limits on coastal Maryland, Delmarva, and New Jersey. CuypE F. Rrrp, Reed Herpetorium, Baltimore, Md. (Received July 22, 1957) While studying the flora of southeastern United States, the author has observed that various southern herptiles also find their northern limits in our region. About 75 species of plants with a general distribution southward to Florida have their northern limit in Maryland, on Delmarva or in southern New Jersey. Most of these species of plants having the said distribution are found on the Outer Coastal Plain. Their northern limit, known at the present time, has been annotated in a botanical paper by the author dealing with the northern ex- tensions of the southern coastal flora. Most notable of the species of plants finding their northern limit in Maryland or on the Delmarva Peninsula are: Taxodiwm distichum (cypress), Tillandsia wusneordes (Spanish moss), Quercus virginiana (live oak), Xanthoxylum clava-herculis, Bignonia capreolata, Trilium pusillum var. virginia- num, Berchemia scandens, Symplocos tinc- toria, Borrichia frutescens, and Passiflora incarinata. There are 21 herptiles that have a similar southern Coastal Plain distribution and have their northern limitations in Maryland, on Delmarva or in southern New Jersey. A couple of the species range more northward into southern New England and Massa- chusetts. However, some of the southern Coastal Plain plants also range northward into New Jersey, Long Island, and Massa- chusetts. 1. Rana virgatipes Cope. Atlantic Coastal Plain from southern New Jersey to southeastern Georgia. New Jersey (Atlantic, Type Locatiry; Burlington, Monmouth, Essex, Cape May, Mer- cer, Ocean); Delaware (Sussex); Maryland (Dor- chester, Worcester, and Charles). See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, No. 16, in Herpetologica, 1957. Map 1 (@). 2. Hyla femoralis Sonnini and Latreille. Lower Coastal Plain from southern Maryland and south- eastern Virginia to eastern Louisiana. Maryland (Calvert: Battle Creek, see Fowler, Maryland Journ. Nat. Hist. 17(1): 6-7, 1947). Map 1(X). 3. Hyla cinerea (Schneider). Coastal Plain from Delaware and Maryland south through the lowlands of the Atlantic and Gulf States from Virginia to Texas; north in the Mississippi Basin to southern Illinois. Delaware (Sussex), Maryland (Cecil, Kent, Queen Annes, Talbot, Dorchester, Harford, Baltimore (coastal), Somerset, W1i- comico, Worcester, St. Marys, Charles, Calvert, Anne Arundel, Prince Georges). See Reed, Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 46(10): 328-332. 1956. Delmarva Virginia (Accomac and Northampton). See Reed, Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 47(3): 89-91, 1957. Map 2. 4. Hyla andersoni Baird. Southern New Jersey ; Southern Pines, N. C.; Anderson, 8. C.; coastal Georgia. It is interesting to note that Rana virgatipes has also been recorded from southern New Jersey, from Southern Pines, N. C., and from coastal Georgia. See Davis, Amer. Nat. 41 (481): 49-51, 1907. 5. Scaphiopus holbrooki holbrooki (Harlan). Eastern United States from Massachusetts to Florida, west to Louisiana, eastern Texas, and Arkansas, north in the midwest to West Vir- ginia, southern Ohio, Indiana, and Illinois. Although this toad ranges northward from our region in Maryland into central Pennsylvania by way of the Frederick Valley and the coastal re- cesses in that region, it is limited to the coastal regions. See Reed, Herpetologica 12(4): 294-295. 1956. Maryland (Frederick, St. Marys, Charles, Calvert, Prince Georges, Anne Arundel, Worces- ter, Wicomico, Somerset, Dorchester, Talbot, Caroline, Kent); Delaware (Sussex, Kent, New Castle) and Delmarva Virginia (Accomac). Map 3. 6. Microhyla carolinensis carolinensis (Hol- brook). Maryland to Key West, Fla., west and north to Illinois and Missouri, Kansas, eastern Oklahoma, and eastern Texas. Maryland (Cal- vert and St. Marys). See Noble and Hassler, Copeia 1936(1): 63-64; Mansueti, Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc. Maryland 12(3): 33-34. 1942. Map 4(@). 7. Siren lacertina Linnaeus. Maryland and JANUARY 1958 Rana virgatipes Y eee i (e) y Ge 6 < ’ : a Hyla femoralis ho \ eS A (x) Gg \ S e 6/ ian he YG Oh Hey } Lf Scaphiopus h. holbrooki Map 5 Cemophora coccinea (e) Pituophis melanoleucus (x) Map 7 f pee. Lampropeltis c. rhombo- maculata Virginia on the west side of Chesapeake Bay, coastal North and South Carolina, southern Georgia and Alabama, throughout Florida. Mary- land and District of Columbia (Potomac Flats). See Hay, Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 15: 121- 146. 1902. Map 4(++). REED: HERPETOLOGY OF MARYLAND AND DELMARVA, 17 29 Map 2 Hyla cinerea Map 4 Microhyla c. carolinensis(e) Siren lacertina (+) Abastor erythro- grammus (x) Map 8 Lampropeltis doliata temporalis 8. Abastor erythrogrammus (Latreille). Mary- land (Charles) through the Atlantic Coastal Plain to central Florida and Alabama. Maryland (Charles: 4 miles South of Indian Head, Stump Neck, between Mattawoman and Chicomuxen Creek. H. Hassler.) See McCauley, Lower 30 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. I Pt @Pa Map 9 Map 10 ampropeltis Natrix : ei eeuias erythrogaster Map 11 Diadophis Cnemidophorus p. punctatus sexilineatus NJ Ly gosoma laterale Map 15 : aN nt ee : p Ne =] (Ge r - Map 16 Malaclemys a. Lee .: centrata Vv (? heer Pseudemys concentrica A; on floridana (M. terrapin) \s e/ | concinna \’ Neh ae ® a y a < we | The reptiles of Maryland and the District of Colum- Gulf States, west to Louisiana and Oklahoma. bia, 1945; Copeia 1939(1): 54. Map 4(xX). Maryland (Calvert, Baltimore, Prince Georges, 9. Cemophora coccinea Blumenbach. Southern Anne Arundel), District of Columbia. See Reed, New Jersey, southward through the Atlantic and Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and JANUARY 1958 Delmarva, No. 8. Snakes of Maryland, etc. 1956. Map 5(@). 10. Elaphe guttata guttata Linnaeus. Southern New Jersey to the tip of Florida, west to north- eastern Mexico, north in the interior to Kentucky and Missouri and in the west to western Colorado and Great Salt Lake. Maryland (Prince Georges, Anne Arundel, adjacent Montgomery, St. Marys, Talbot, Wicomico), District of Columbia and Delaware (Sussex). See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, Nos. § and 11. 1956. Map 6. 11. Lampropeltis calligaster rhombomaculata Holbrook. Southern Maryland and _ Virginia, south to eastern Tennessee and central Florida, and westward through Alabama and Mississippi. Maryland (Prince Georges, Anne Arundel, ad- jacent Montgomery) and District of Columbia. See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, No. 8, 1956. Map 7. 12. Lampropeltis doliata temporalis Cope. Southern New Jersey, Delaware, and Maryland through Virginia and North Carolina. Maryland (Prince Georges, Calvert, St. Marys, Worcester), District of Columbia and Delaware (Tyrer Lo- CALITY). Map 8. 13. Lampropeltis getulus getulus (Linnaeus). Southern New Jersey to northern Florida, west- ward to southeastern Alabama. Maryland (Gar- rett, Montgomery, Prince Georges, Charles, St. Marys, Calvert, Anne Arundel, Howard, Balti- more City, Baltimore, Harford, Cecil, Queen Annes, Kent, Talbot, Dorchester, Wicomico, Worcester, Somerset), District of Columbia, Delaware (Sussex), and Delmarva Virginia (Ac- comac and Northampton). See Reed, Contribu- tions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, Nos. § and 11. 1956, and Contributions to the herpetology of Virginia, No. 3, in Journ. Washing- ton Acad. Sci. 47(8): 89-91. 1957. Map 9. 14. Natrix erythrogaster erythrogaster Forster. Maryland southward in the Coastal Plain and adjacent Piedmont to northern Florida. Mary- land (St. Marys, Wicomico, and Worcester). See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Mary- land and Delmarva, No. § and 11. 1956. Map 10. 15. Diadophis punctatus punctatus Linnaeus. Coastal Maryland to Florida. Maryland (Charles, Calvert, Anne Arundel, Queen Annes, Talbot, Dorchester, and Worcester), Delaware (Sussex), and Delmarva Virginia (Accomac). See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, Nos. § and 11. 1956. Map 11. REED: HERPETOLOGY OF MARYLAND AND DELMARVA, 17 31 16. Pituophis melanoleucus melanoleucus (Dau- din). New York (Rockland) south to South Caro- lina and westward to eastern Tennessee. Mary- land (Queen Annes and Worcester). The New York locality is just north of the New Jersey border. Map 5(X). 17. Cnemidophorus sexlineatus (Linnaeus). Maryland to Key West, Florida, west to eastern Texas, north in the interior to Indiana and Illnois, and along the rivers in southern Wis- consin and Minnesota, and through Oklahoma to South Dakota and southeastern Wyoming. Mary- land (Anne Arundel, Calvert, Charles, St. Marys, Baltimore and Baltimore City) and District of Columbia. Absent from the Delmarva Penin- sula. See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, No. 6. The Lizards of Maryland, etc. 1956. Map 12. 18. Humeces laticeps (Schneider). Southern Pennsylvania and Delaware, southward to Florida, westward through Ohio, Indiana, Illinois and southeastern Missouri, west to eastern Kansas, eastern Oklahoma and eastern Texas. Maryland (Anne Arundel, Baltimore, Calvert, St. Marys, Charles, Montgomery, Queen Annes, Dorchester, Frederick) and Delaware. See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, No. 6, 1956. Map 13. 19. Lygosoma laterale (Say). Southern New Jersey and southeastern Pennsylvania south- ward; southern Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, and northern Missouri; westward to eastern Kansas, eastern and central Oklahoma, and Texas. Mary- land (Prince Georges, Calvert, Charles, St. Marys, Dorchester and Worcester,) District of Columbia and Delmarva Virginia (Accomae and Northampton). See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, Nos. 6 and 11; Contributions to the Herpetology of Virginia, No. 8, i Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 47(3): 906, 1957. Map 14. Note: EHumeces inexpectatus Taylor ranges as far north as the northern shores of Northern Neck, Virginia, which is the southern shore of the Potomac River. The Maryland line extends to the southern bank of the Potomac River. Northumberland County, Va., 1 mile north of Heathsville, near Clarks Mill, May 15, 1954, Reed 854. See Reed, Herpetologica 12: 1386. 1956, and Contributions to the herpetology of Virgim No. 2, The herpetofauna of Northern Neck, Vur- ginta, in Journ. Washington Acad. Sei. 47(1): 21-23. 1957. 32 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 20. Pseudemys floridana concinna (LeConte). Atlantic Coastal Plain from Maryland to Ala- bama, mostly above the Fall Line and into eastern Tennessee. Maryland (Montgomery, Prince Georges, Charles) and District of Columbia. See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, No. 7. 1956. Map 16. 21. Malaclemys centrata concentrica (Shaw). Coastal Plain from Massachusetts to North Caro- lina, including Delaware and Chesapeake Bays and to Florida. Maryland (Calvert, Somerset, Caroline, Queen Annes, Talbot, Wicomico, Dor- chester, Kent, and Worcester), District of Colum- bia, Delaware (Sussex and Kent) and Delmarva Virginia (Accomac and Northampton). See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, Nos. 7 and 11. 1956; Contributions to the herpetology of Virginia, No. 3, mn Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 47(8): 89-91. 1957. Map 115), Incidentally, there are four deep-sea turtles from tropical and semitropical south Atlantic waters that find their way up the Atlantic Coastal area as far north as Maryland, Delaware, Massa- chusetts, and Nova Scotia. Specimens of these have been recorded from the lower Potomac River and the Chesapeake Bay or from Delaware Bay in our region. These turtles are usually stragglers that come up the Gulf Stream from time to time. However, large numbers have been seen and at times have been caught in the Chesa- peake Bay off Virginia and southern Maryland. As many as five Caretta caretta have been caught in the fish nets in a single day by a single fisher- man. Capt. W. J. Biddlecomb of Fairport, Va.., reports many of these and other deep-sea turtles in the waters off Great Wicomico Light House. The records for these turtles are recorded in Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Virginia, No. 2, The herpetofauna of Northern Neck, Vir- gina (Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 47(1): 21-28. 1957). Also, Maryland and Delmarva specimens are annotated in The contributions to the her- petology of Maryland and Delmarva, Nos. 7 and 11. 1956. 22. Caretta caretta caretta (Linnaeus). Atlantic vou. 48, NO. 1 and Gulf coasts of United States from Maryland and the Chesapeake Bay southward. Maryland (Calvert, lower Potomac River and Chesapeake Bay, Dorchester and Worcester), Delaware (Sussex), and Delmarva Virginia (Accomac and Northampton). See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Virginia, No. 2, l.c., 1997. 23. Chelonia mydas mydas (Linnaeus). Tropical and subtropical Atlantic waters, northward to temperate zones. Maryland (Calvert). See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, No. 7. 1956. 24. Dermochelys coriacea (L.). Atlantic and Gulf coasts, occasional as far north as Nova Scotia. Maryland (Calvert and Chesapeake Bay) and Delmarva Virginia (Accomac). See Reed, Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 47(1): 21-23. 1957, for picture of 700-pound specimen caught off Northern Neck, Va. 25. Lepidochelys (olivacea) kempi (Garman). Atlantic coast north from tropical waters to Massachusetts. Maryland (St. Marys, lower Potomac River and Chesapeake Bay). See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, No. 7. 1956; Contributions to the herpetology of Virginia, Nos. 2 and 3. 1957, both in Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 47(1) and 47(3), respectively. The 21 herptiles listed above represent about 25 percent of the species in the herpetofauna of Maryland and Delmarva. Seven of these find their northern limit in southern Maryland (the Coastal Plain area west of Chesapeake Bay); eight of the species, found on the Coastal Plain, find their northern limit in coastal New Jersey; two range into southeastern Pennsylvania along the Dela- ware River. The accompanying maps indicate the counties in Maryland, Delaware, the District of Columbia, and Delmarva Virginia where the various species have been collected. References are given with each species where an annotated list of specimens may be found. Contributions 5 through 11 to the Herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva have been published by the author and are available from the Reed Herpetorium, 10105 Harford Road, Baltimore 34, Md. Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences Representing the Affiliated Societies Pnriosophical Society of Washington . ..........c0ceececcsencrsceeees CHESTER H. PaGE Anthropological Society of Washington................0...seeeceees Frank M. Serz.er Biological Society of Washington................. Se Gea Wes Ae ei HERBERT FRIEDMANN Shemueal society of Washington. .....5.....00...00 cence ce eedececss CHARLES R. NAESER Entomological Society of Washington........................... Car. F. W. MurEsEBECK epronalGeographic Society............0....00 0 ce eeceeacteyderecce ALEXANDER WETMORE Geolopresl Society of Washington..................ecccecceeceeeues Epwin T. McKnieut Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... FREDERICK O. CoE Paramaaiam@elistOrical SOCIebY «6... eo i cee ca eee hn dbo ved eeeeanncae U.S. Grant, III Bocaures society of Washington... .......00..cc0evcccccctewcccuesocees Carrot E. Cox Washington Section, Society of American Foresters................. G. Fuippo GRAVATT Washington Society of Engineers................00.cccceccccccceecs HERBERT G. DorsEy Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers........ ARNOLD H. Scorr Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers.... ... Howarp S. Brean Helminthological Society of Washington.....................0... Donaup B. McMuLuen Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists....... MicHakEL J. PELCZAR, JR. Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers............. FLoyp W. Hovuaes Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers......................... Harry WELLS D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers............... Dovatas E. Parsons D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine........ GrorceE A. HorrLe Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals.................. HERBERT C. VACHER Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research..WiLLiam T. SWEENEY Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. F. N. FRENKIEL D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society..................... CHARLES S. GILMAN CONTENTS Mrneratocy.—Progress in titanium research. MatrHew A. HUNTER. . PALEONTOLOGY.—Some Lower Ordovician monoplacophoran mollusks from Missouri. -Eniis L. YOCHELSON «.........<... =) == PaLEonToLoGy.—Hedbergella, a new name for a Cretaceous planktonic foraminiferal genus. Paut BrONNIMANN and Nozt K. Brown, JE: oo] EntromMoLocy.—Venomous moths and butterflies. Howarp F. ALLARD and Harry Ac ALLARD... 2. ers. aes... ae ee Enromotocy.—A recharacterization of the genus Coelopencyrtus, with descriptions of two new species (Hymenoptera: Encyrtidae). BUDE BuRKS es ae ts i een EnromoLogy.—A new species of Meropleon Dyar from South Carolina (Lepidoptera: Noctuidae). E. L. Topp..............+..+++++2:: Herrprrotocy.—Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, No. 17: Southeastern herptiles with northern limits on coastal Maryland, Delmarva, and New Jersey. Crypp I’. ReED.... 15 18 22 27 Notestand: NEWS. , 4 5 CiinGe \nGuteo COSSURA DELTA N.SP. Fig. 1.—Diagrammatic representation of the anterior regions of the known species of Cossura. The number of asetigerous segments posterior to the prostomium is indicated by the letters A and B. The setigerous segment number is indicated by the numerals. The single letter S within a segment indicates that the setae of the notopodium and neuropodium are continuous. Two letter S’s indicate separation of the setae of these two lobes. collected by Robert H. Parker, with a size 1 tive studies coupled with refinement of Hayward orange-peel bucket, of the Scripps Institution of Oceanography. The results of the quantitative survey, including a list of the polychaetes collected, have been published (Parker, 1956). 1 Contribution no. 210 from the Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern California. handling techniques once the samples have been taken. Cossura longocirrata was de- scribed by Webster and Benedict (1887 for specimens collected at Eastport, Maine. ‘This species was subsequently reported from Denmark (Ehason, 1920; Thulin, 1921 North Atlantic (Wesenberg-Lund, 1950), 54 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES and British Columbia (Berkeley and Berke- ley, 1956). Cossura candida was recently described by Hartman (1955b) from south- ern California. Included under this species are the reports from San Pedro Basin (Hartman, 1955a, as Cossura sp.), Los Angeles—Long Beach Harbors (Anon., 1952, as Cossura longicirrata [sic]; Reish, 1955, as Cossura sp.) and Alamitos Bay (Reish and Winter, 1954, as Cossura longicirrata [sic]). More recently Jones (1956) described Cossura pygodactylata from San Francisco Bay. Family CrRRATULIDAE Cossura Webster and Benedict, Cossura delta, n. sp. Genus 1887 Many individuals, all incomplete posteriorly, come from the Pass a Loutre region of the Mississippi River Delta, Gulf of Mexico (Parker, 1956). The holotype measures 66 mm in length and 0.5 mm in width. A total of 25 setigerous segments are present. The ten paratypes have from 22 to 34 setigerous segments and measure from 5 to 10 mm in length. Anterior end—The prostomium is conical in shape, has two nuchal organs, but lacks eyes. The proboscis is everted in some of the specimens; the base bears from 15 to 20 digitate lobes. The peristomium lacks setae. The first setigerous segment follows the peristomium. Cossura delta, as the other species in the genus, lacks parapodia; the setae originate directly from the lateral body wall. The first setigerous segment is biramous with the setae forming a continuous lateral series (Fig. 1). Beginning with the second setig- erous segment, the setae of the notopodial region and the neuropodial region are distinctly separated (Fig. 1). The single long, cylindrical tentacle originates from the middorsum of the third setigerous segment. It measures 8 mm in the holotype, but it was undoubtably broken during the process of collecting. Setae-—There are two kinds of setae in Cossura delta. One type is a simple capillary which is armed with spines along its outer edge (Fig. 2, A). They are found in both the notopodium and the neuropodium. They number 7 to 9 per lobe in the notopodium (Fig. 2, A) and are directed posteriorly. The capillaries are more slender in the neuropodium (Fig. 2, B). These setae, which number 4 to 8 per lobe, are directed posteriorly. VOL. 48, NO. 2 B C 56 Fic. 2.—A, Capillary seta from the notopodium of segment 10; B, capillary seta from the neuro- podium of segment 10; C, limbate seta from the neuropodium of segment 10; D, limbate seta from the neuropodium of segment 15. The second kind of setae is simple curved limbate ones (Fig. 2, C) which are limited to the anterior neuropodial segments. They begin at the first setigerous segment, reach their maximum development at segments 7 to 12, and gradually diminish in size from segments 18 to 25 (Fig. 2, C and D). Fine spines are present along the outer margin of these setae. Generally four limbate setae are present in each lobe. These setae are directed slightly forward. Postertor end.—It is unknown in Cossura delta since all specimens were incomplete posteriorly. The posterior end of the other three species are similar. The setae are as in the anterior segments, and the pygidium bears three long anal cirri. In addition, C. pygodactylata is characterized by possessing 6 to 10 digitate lobes on either side of the anus. Discussion.—Cossura delta differs from the other known species of the genus in possessing curved limbate setae in the anterior neuropodia (Fig. 2, C and D), and the separation of the notopodial and neurcpodial setae at the second FEBRUARY 1958 setigerous segment (Fig. 1). This species comes nearest to C. longocirrata as reported by Wesen- berg-Lund (1950) and Berkeley and Berkeley (1956). These two species are characterized by having one setigerous segment posterior to the prostomium and the tentacle originating from the dorsum of the third setigerous segment (some- times second in C. longocirrata as stated by Wesenberg-Lund, 1950) (Fig. 1). The anterior ends of the four species of the genus are diagram- matically represented in Fig. 1. Since some differ- - ences exist between the reports of C. longocirrata by Webster and Benedict (1887) and that by Wesenberg-Lund (1950) and Berkeley and Berke- ley (1956), diagrams are included for each. Type matertial—The holotype (U.S.N.M. no. 28706) and 5 paratypes (U.S.N.M. no 28707) have been deposited in the U. S. National Museum. Five paratypes have been placed in the polychaete collections of the Allan Hancock Foundation. University of Southern California. Type locality—Station number 328 (Parker, 1956), off Pass A’Loutre region of the Mississippi River Delta. It was collected in shallow depths in clayey sediments. LITERATURE CITED ANON. Los Angeles—Long Beach Harbor pollution survey. Los Angeles Regional Water Pollu- tion Control Board No. 4, Los Angeles, Calif.., 43 pp. 1952. BERKELEY, E., and BerKeLny, C. Notes on poly- chaeta from the east coast of Vancouver Island and from adjacent waters, with a description REISH: NEW SPECIES OF COSSURA Or Or of a new species of Aricidea. Journ. Fish. Res. Bd. Canada 13: 541-546. 1956. EviaAson, ANDERS. Biologisch-faunistische Unter- suchungen aus dem Oresund. Polychaeta. Lunds Univ. Arsskr., N. F. Avd. 2,16 (6) : 1-103. 1920. HARTMAN, OLGA. Quantitative survey of the benthos of San Pedro Basin, southern California. Pre- liminary Results. Allan Hancock Pacific Exped. 19(1): 1-185. 1955a. . Endemism in the North Pacific Ocean, with emphasis on the distribution of marine annelids, and description of new or little known species. In “Essays in the Natural Sciences in Honor of Captain Allan Hancock,” pp. 39-60. Uni- versity of Southern California Press, 1955b. Jones, Merepitu L. Cossura pygodactylata, a new annelid from San Francisco Bay (Poly- chaeta: Cuirratulidae). Journ. Washington Acad. Sei. 46: 127-130. 1956. PARKER, Ropert H. Macro-invertebrate assem- blages as indicators of sedimentary environ- ments in east Mississippi Delta region. Bull. Amer. Assoc. Petrol. Geol. 40: 295-376. 1956. Reis, Donaup J. The relation of polychaetous annelids to harbor pollution. Public Health Rep. 70: 1168-1174. 1955. ——— and WintTER, Howarp A. The ecology of Alamitos Bay, California, with special reference to pollution. California Fish and Game 40: 105-121. 1954. Tuuuin, Gustav. Biologische-faunistische Unter- suchungen aus dem Oresund. Uber Cossura longocirrata Webster and Benedict und tiber die Rohren von Disoma multisetosum Oersted. Lunds Univ. Arsskr., n. Fr. Avd. 2, 17(10): EE Pal Wesster, Harrison E., and Benepict, JAMES E. The Annelida Chaetopoda from Eastport, Maine. Rep. U. S. Comm. Fish. for 1885: 707-755. 1887. WESENBERG-LUND, Eusre. Polychaeta. Ingolf-Expedition 4(14): 1-92. 1950. Danish I envy no man that knows more than myself but pity them that know less.—S1r THOMAS BROWNE. 56 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 2 ZOOLOGY .—A survey of inequivalve pelecypods. Davin Nicou, U. 8. National Museum. (Received November 22, 1957) In their brief paper on discordant pelecy- pods Newell and Merchant (1939, p. 176) make the following statement: ‘‘Evidently discordaney is not prevalent in modern forms, for there is scarcely any mention of the phenomenon in the literature that we have examined.’ These authors limit the meaning of discordancy to a difference in height and length measurements of the two valves, or, in their term, the ‘‘diameter”’ of the valves. Although they are correct in implying that little has been written on the subject of discordant valves in modern pelecypods, except in conjunction with general morphologic descriptions of pelecy- pod taxa, they err in inferring that dis- cordancy is an uncommon phenomenon among living representatives of this class of mollusks. On page 177, Newell and Merchant make the following statement: ‘‘However, there are many modern forms with markedly inequivalve convexity in which the valve margins are perfectly accordant.”’ This certainly is not the case. Most examples of marked inequality of the valve convexities also show some discordancy. Moreover, in some cucullaeids and corbulids, for ex- ample, some discordancy is present ac- companied by little difference in the con- vexity of the two valves. Actually, inequal valves of pelecypods may vary as to con- vesity as well as diameter, and these two variations are sometimes accompanied by a discrepancy in the ornamentation on the two valves of a specimen. This paper will deal with inequivalve pelecypods in the broader sense because these variations are commonly interrelated mor- phologically. I have listed in tabular form suborders, superfamilies, families, and gen- era of inequivalve pelecypods, most of which are also discordant. The list is not to be considered exhaustive, and only a few fossil groups are mentioned. However, from the list alone, it should be quite clear that discordant pelecypods are far from rare. Many families and genera of normally equivalve pelecypods are, on rare occasions, represented by individuals which, through some freak of growth, whether inspired by environment or by some genetic peculiarity or both, have developed inequal valves. These odd specimens will be ignored for the present discussion. Some of the more unusual occurrences of Inequivalve elec Cte are covered by Lamy (1930). Even in families and genera whose representatives are considered normally equivalve, the two valves usually do not coincide perfectly with each other. A case in point is seen in the Astartidae (Nicol, 1955, p. 155) where in the lunular area the margin of the right valve slightly overlaps the left, whereas in the escutcheonal area the left valve slightly overlaps the right. Cotton and Godfrey (1938, p. 169) point out the same phenomenon in the genus Cuna (Crassatel- lidae). The right valves of some donacids slightly overlap the left valves along the dorsal margin. More examples of this mor- phologie characteristic could be included. This is apparently a supplementary locking device to keep the valves from twisting, and for our present discussion this phe- nomenon, with but one possible exception, will not be included in the inequivalve pelecypods. In this discussion of inequivalve pelecy- pods I shall begin with the most primitive taxa and conclude with the most specialized ones. Pelecypods having protobranch ctenidia are structurally the most primitive living members of the class. It is interesting to note that none of them is included in the list of inequivalve forms. Could this mean that the first pelecypods (late Cambrian or early Ordovician) all were equivalve? It may be that the inequivalve characteristic did not appear with the most ancient pelecypods but was a secondary morphologic feature which manifested itself a short time later. Although the majority of Ordovician pelecypods are equivalve, there are a few genera, most of them having small numbers FEBRUARY 1958 of species, which are inequivalve. One such genus is Aristerella. It is found in Middle Ordovician strata and is the oldest in- equivalve pelecypod I have seen. The exact systematic position of the genus is in doubt; it has been placed among the mytilaceans by most paleontologists and in the pteriaceans by others. Ulrich (1897, p. 524), the original deseriber, and subsequent workers have reported Arzsterella as having the right valve larger than the left. This genus has a some- what pteroid shape, and, if the obliquity of the shell is prosocline, the right valve is the more convex on most, but not all, the speci- mens examined. (The one or two exceptions are small internal casts and may be ex- amples of distortion.) Two large specimens from Estonia, labeled Arzsterella in the col- lection of the U. 5. National Museum, are strikingly imequivalve, the right valves being larger than the left. In this respect Aristerella is similar to Hezkea from the late Ordovician of Sweden. Isberg (1934, pp. 273-315, 388-389) describes Hetkea and allocates the genus to the family Cyrtodon- tidae, which some systematists have placed among the prionodonts probably for want of a more accurate assignment. Although the specimens which Isberg figures are not markedly inequivalve, he asserts that in most species of Hezkea the right valves are larger than the left. Another early Paleozoic group which is inequivalve is the family Antipleuridae. This family of paleoconchs is restricted to the late Silurian and early Devonian and is represented by such genera as Antipleura, Dalila, and Dualina. According to Lamy (1930, p. 130, footnote) either left or right valves may be larger. Figured specimens of these genera show a great difference in the sizes of the valves. From late Ordovician onward throughout the remainder of the Paleozoic, because of the abundance of pteriaceans and pectina- ceans, most of the mequivalve pelecypods have their left valves larger than their right valves. Besides the exceptions to this rule already mentioned, Vertumnia, a pterino- pectinoid genus restricted to the Devonian; many species of Cypricardinia; and the obscure genus Dexiobia all have right valves NICOL: SURVEY OF INEQUIVALVE PELECYPODS od larger than left valves. Cypricardinia ranges from Silurian through Mississippian, and Dexiobia is confined to the latter Period. I have not attempted to list all the Paleozoic pelecypods having larger left valves than right. Furthermore, I have listed none in which the inequivalve char- acteristic is doubtful, whether left or right. Some paleontologists assert that certain Paleozoic genera are inequivalve whereas others do not mention this characteristic in their generic or familial descriptions. The imphed discrepancy may be due to over- sight on the part of some workers or to distorted specimens in the Paleozoic collec- tions of others. Bivalves with filibranch ctenidia—i.e., those whose morphological development is second most primitive—constitute the larg- est group of imequivalve pelecypods from the standpoint of percentage. Most members of this order have well-developed byssal attachments or are attached by their shells directly to the substrate or, if free-living, have descended from ancestors which had some form of attachment. Apparently their pleurothetic mode of life is related to the inequal development of their valves. Fur- thermore, among the filibranchs, the in- equivalve condition is most consistent as well as prevalent. In most families, the inequi- valve species always have their left valves larger, but in a few families the inequivalve representatives always have their right valves larger. There are few exceptions, and this consistency can be considered, along with other morphological characters, as an indication of phyletic relationship. There are several groups of filibranchs which consistently are either equivalve or if inequivalve, have the left valves larger than the right. The Pteriacea are probably the most ancient and among the most prominent of this group. The Leiopteridae and Pterineidae commonly have inequal valves, and the left valves are always the larger. (See La Roeque, 1950). A striking example of this inequivalve condition is seen in the genus Cornellites. These pteriaceans, which are among the most ancient in- equivalve pelecypods, are like the modern species, and it is quite significant that this 58 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES large superfamily, which first appeared in the Ordovician Period, has consistently throughout its long history possessed the same inequivalve characteristic—the left valves invariably being the larger. Other fossil pteriaceans which are inequivalve include the genus Buchia and the family Myalinidae; both have representatives with their left valves larger than the right. (I must add that I would include the Mya- linidae with the Pteriacea rather than the Mytilacea on the bases of the inequivalve condition, the shape of the shell, and the appearance of the ligamental area, despite Newell’s assertion in 1942.) Many living species of the Pteriidae are inequivalve, the left valves always Hae larger than the right. The mytilaceans seem to be a consistently equivalve group with but few exceptions. Myoforceps aristata has prolonged posterior ends of the valves which tend to cross over each other. In some specimens the right and in others the left valves are the larger and more prolonged. Other exceptions are Stavelia torta and Stavelia horrida, large shells found in the Philippines and Queens- land. In these species either right or left valves may be larger. Fluviolanatus subtorta is another inequivalve mytilid found in Australian waters. Another group of filibranchs is the priono- donts, which first appear in the Devonian. The Cucullaeidae and their allies constitute a large suborder, and among its representa- tives are some species which are inequivalve, the left valves always being the larger and overlapping the right valves along the ventral border. Sometimes this discordancy is accompanied by a striking discrepancy in the ornamentation on the two valves. Some Paleozoic representatives of the Pri- onodonta and some Paleozoic Pteriacea are remarkably similar in outline and hinge characters, and the fact that both groups have similar inequivalve conditions leads to the possible inference that these two great groups are closely related. In addition to the pteriaceans and _ pri- onodonts, a third and related group having inequivalve species is the Isognomonacea, which includes fossil groups like Cox’s Bakevelliidae and the well-known genus VOL. 48, NO. 2 Inoceramus. Besides the tendency to have inequal valves, the left valves bemg con- sistently the larger, these three large groups have other morphologic similarities to link them. The modern isognomonids are not so conspicuously inequivalve as their fossil ancestors, but in an occasional species the larger size of the left valves is noticeable. The strange family Vulsellidae, which may be related to the isognomonids, has inequivalve representatives. Either valve may be the larger, but the left valve is the larger more commonly than the right. The valves of the vulsellids are often very irregular, but the inequivalve condition is not marked. In the Placunidae, also, the — valves are commonly larger. There is some variation as to anen valve is the larger in the modern Pectinacea, but in all specimens that are strikingly mequi- valve their right valves are the more convex and in most cases overlap the left. The right valves are larger in Spondylus, Plicatula, Pedum, the Cretaceous genus Nezthea, and some Pecten, sensu. lato. In a few modern pectens, however, the left valves are slightly larger than the right, and this condition is true also in the Propeamussiidae. Newell and Merchant (p. 175) note that the left valves are larger than the right in the late Paleozoic pectinacean genera Avizculopecten and Pernopecten, but the right valves are larger in specimens of the pterinopectinoid genus Vertumnia, which is confined to the Devonian Period. An analysis of the inequi- valve condition among the pectinaceans might give some valuable data on the rela- tionships of the many genera and subgenera within the superfamily. Even a few of the fossi! limids are inequi- valve. Some Jurassic limids represented in the collection of the U.S. Geological Survey, mainly by those belonging to the genus Ctenostreon, have more convex right valves than left. Cox (1948, p. 153) in his deserip- tion of the family characters of the Limidae made this statement: ‘‘There is no anterior subauricular notch like that found in many Pectinidae and Pteriidae, an anterior mar- ginal gape for the protrusion of the foot and byssus affecting (if present) both valves equally.’’ In living species the byssal gape FEBRUARY 1958 usually does affect both valves equally, but in some, almost always the strongly-ribbed ones, more of the byssal gape is in the right valve and in a few cases the gape is wholly in the right valve. In the Ostreidae the left, or attached, valves are either equal in size to, or larger than, the right valves. This is equally true of such Mesozoic genera as Gryphaea and Exogyra as well as of living species of oysters. The genus Chondrodonta, which is con- fined to Cretaceous rocks, is attached by its shell to the substrate. Like most ostreids, the attached (left) valves are always the larger. Because of the peculiar hinge and muscula- ture, the systematic position of Chondrodonta is still in doubt, and it has been placed in the Ostreidae, Pectinacea, Pinnidae, and Myti- lidae by various paleontologists. On the other hand, the Anomuidae are attached to the substrate by their right valves, but the upper (left) valves are always larger. Likewise, in the aberrant Dimyidae, the left or unattached valves are the larger ones. Two interesting Upper Cre- taceous genera, Diploschiza and Pulvinites, apparently are like Anomza and Dimya in that they are attached to the substrate by their right valves, and the unattached or upper (left) valves are the larger. Some aberrant thick-shelled Jurassic and Lower Cretaceous pinnids are inequivalve. These forms are placed in the genera 7’ri- chites and Stegoconcha. In most cases the left valves are the larger. It is worthwhile to pause here and sum- marize the data on the filibranchs thus far reviewed. The most noteworthy thing about this large order, with its numerous fossil as well as living representatives, is that the left valves are larger in the preponderance of inequivalve species. The exceptions to this are found in the Paleozoic pectinacean genus Vertumnia, most of the Mesozoic and Cenozoic Pectinidae, the Plicatulidae, the Spondylidae, a few of the Vulsellidae, and a few species of the Mytilidae. This, to my mind, has phylogenetic significance and a definite bearing on the classification of the order. Another characteristic of the filibranchs with a well developed byssus is that where the byssal notch is confined to one valve, or NICOL: SURVEY OF INEQUIVALVE PELECYPODS 59 is predominately in one valve, it is the right valve that has the notch or the larger portion of it. This is true of the Pectinacea, Pteri- acea, Prionodonta, Anomiidae, Isognomon- idae, Limidae (as pointed out previously), and undoubtedly others. I have made only a cursory survey of this characteristic and there may be some exceptions to this condi- tion. However, the character is so consistent among the filibranchs that a definite phy- letic unity is indicated. One other observa- tion should be noted here. The pleurothetic filibranchs are more likely to have the byssal notch confined to the right valve. This is not always true, but it is certainly the common condition. On the other hand, some of the prionodonts are attached in a position so that the valve margins are perpendicular to the substrate. In many of these the byssal notch has migrated somewhat so that it is partly in each valve. Beginning with the Unionacea there are several large families and superfamilies of pelecypods having less primitive ctenidial structure whose representatives, with few exceptions, are equivalve. Some of these exceptions may be unintentionally over- looked, as I have not attempted to trace all aberrant and obscure species of large taxa. Most of the aberrant species occupy a different ecologic niche from the main body of species of a family. Furthermore, in most of these cases either the right or the left valves may be the larger, as typified by Beguina, Miltha, and a few of the vener- aceans. Among the unionaceans (the Aetheridae) a few African and South American species are found attached to the substrate by shell cementation. They may be attached by either valve, and either valve may be the larger; furthermore, there is no apparent correlation between which valve is attached and which is the larger. Lamy (pp. 144-151) describes and figures a few contorted and inequivalve specimens of the unionacean genera Quadrula, Unio, Pseudospatha, Cune- opsis, Nodularia, and Arconara. The Carditidae are a large and ancient family with nearly all its species equivalve; however, the aberrant genus Beguina, which lives in the Indo-Pacific region, is mequi- valve, and either valve may be the larger. 60 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Beguina lives surrounded by living coral. Many pelecypods with this type of habitat have either inequal or irregularly-shaped valves. A few of the dreissenids are discordant, the right valves overlapping the left along a part of the posterior margin. The inequivalve Rudistacea are among the most bizarre of all pelecypods. This large group of Jurassic and Cretaceous bivalves comprises species attached by either valve and in which either the left valve or the right is the larger. The inequivalve condition in the rudistaceans may be important to point to phyletic relationships within the superfamily. One of the less primitive families which has very few inequivalve representatives is the Lucinidae. However, among the lucinids the genus Miltha has inequivalve species, and either valve may be the larger. Most species of the family Chamidae are also inequivalve, and here again either valve may be the larger. This inequivalve character is one of several indications of the close rela- tionship between the lucinids and _ the chamids. Among inequivalve specimens of the latter group it is always the attached valves which are the larger. Even the huge veneracean complex has a few inequivalve species. Venerupis, as well as the Petricolidae, have species in which either valve may be slightly larger than the other. In some species of Claudiconcha the inequivalve trait is very pronounced, the right valves consistently being the larger. In this connection, incidentally, it is noted that Cotton and Godfrey, in describing the genus, state (p. 248) that the right valve is larger than the left; furthermore, their figure of Claudiconcha cumingi (279, p. 247) shows the right overlapping the left, although in their description of this species (p. 249) they assert that the left valve overlaps the right. Most of the Tellinidae are inequivalve in that the valve margins are sinuous and the posterior side of the shell is commonly bent to the right. In this very large family one finds that either the right valves or the left may be the larger in diameter or the more convex. Within a genus, however, the left or the right valves, as the case may be, are consistently the larger, and, as is the situa- vou. 48, No. 2 tion in the Pectinidae, a study of the rela- tionships among the inequivalve genera may give some worthwhile suggestions as to the grouping within the family Tellinidae. For a more detailed account of the inequivalve condition in the Tellinidae, see Lamy (pp. 132-134). A few of the semelids are also inequivalve. The larger number and generally more prominently inequivalve species have the left valves the larger, but in a few cases the right valves may be slightly the more con- vex. Like the tellinids, the posterior end of the shell is commonly bent, and the direction of bending is usually to the right, rarely to the left. Also like the tellinids, but more prominently and commonly so, the anterior end of the shell is bent in the direction opposite to that of the posterior end. Most of the Sanguinolaridae are equivalve but a few species are not, the right valves being distinctly larger than the left. Like the Tellinidae, the posterior ends of some species are bent; but unlike the tellinids, they are bent to either the left or the right in about equal numbers. The description of the inequivalve condi- tion in the tellinids, semelids, and sanguino- lariids shows some remarkable similarities and indicates a close relationship of these three families. Many of the species belonging to the family Pleuromyidae (Triassic to Lower Cretaceous), including those of the genera Pleuromya, Cercomya, and Gresslya, have right valves which overlap the left valves along the dorsal border much like the condi- tion found in some specimens of the Ceno- zoic family Myidae. The corbulids are nearly all inequivalve, many markedly so, and the larger valves are invariably the right ones. A few of the re- lated Myidae are also inequivalve, having in all such cases larger right than left valves, furthermore, when the valves of an inequi- valve myid are closed the umbo of the right is higher than that of the left. Among the inequivalve representatives of the lucinids, chamids, veneraceans, tellinids, sanguinolariids, pleuromyids, corbulids, and myids, the larger valves are commonly the right ones; and among those of the four last- named families it is invariably so. This situ- eee FEBRUARY 1958 ation is the opposite of that of the more primitive filibranchs. The remainder of the pelecypod families discussed are generally inconspicuous groups either because of the small size of the shells or because the groups have small numbers of species and are geographically restricted. In this latter connection, some of the following taxa are not seen frequently because their representatives are restricted to deep water. The relationships of many of these families to each other or to their place in the classifi- cation of the Pelecypoda is not well under- stood. Moreover, their inequivalve condition is not consistent; among the inequivalve species of some families the larger valves are the right, of others they are the left, and of others they may be either one. The Cleidothaeridae are like chamids in external appearance but are characterized by a pearly inner shell and a very different hinge. This family is confined to Australian and New Zealand waters. Specimens of the one living species are consistently attached by their right valves, which are much larger than their left valves. In the Myochamidae, representatives of Myochama are attached to solid objects by the shells of the right valves, and the left valves are much larger and overlap the right. This condition is much like that found in the Anomiidae. Specimens of MWyodora, on the other hand, are not attached, and the right valves are always larger, sometimes con- spicuously so. With the possible exception of a species of Frenamya which Cotton and Godfrey (p. 145) describe as having the right valves more convex than the left, all of the Pandoridae have the left valves larger than the right, and in some cases the discordancy between the valves is great, the left valves overlapping the right along the ventral border. The Lyonsiidae are nearly all equivalve, but the few inequivalve species in this family have the left valves larger than the right. In the Thraciidae the right valves are always larger. Almost all of the periplomatids are inequi- valve, and the larger valves are always the right ones. Although there is little mention of it im NICOL: SURVEY OF INEQUIVALVE PELECYPODS 61 the lterature, the Poromyidae are also inequivalve. The right valve of a specimen overlaps the left valve slightly on both the dorsal and the ventral margins. The Verticordiidae have an unusual type of inequivalve or discordant condition. The right valves overlap the left along the dorsal margin. This morphologic character is simi- lar to that found in the Astartidae and Crassatellidae, but it is much more marked. Many cuspidariids are inequivalve; the consistently larger left valves overlap the right valves along the posteroventral border. In some species of Juliidae there are prominent spiral hornlike structures on the umbonal region of the right valves. This morphologic character is unique among the Pelecypoda. A drawing of the structure is given by Cotton and Godfrey (p. 129). Of the 28 families with living species which are basically inequivalve (this eliminates such groups as the mytilids, carditids, lucinids, and venerids.) half, or 14 of them, have nacreous shells. This 1s an unusually high percentage as compared with the pro- portion of nacreous groups in the entire Pelecypoda. Nacreous shells in the Pelecy- poda are, in general, considered a primitive characteristic. Whether the relatively high correlation between nacreous shells and inequal valves is significant or not awaits a survey of the nacreous groups in the entire Pelecypoda—a _ project that is greatly needed. From the table which summarizes the data and from the more detailed discussion on the various groups, the consistency of the Inequivalve trait obviously is Important in the classification of the Peleeypoda. Some of the evidence from valve inequality merely substantiates the indications from other morphological characters, but, heretofore, the inequivalve trait has been ignored by taxonomists arranging a classification of the Pelecypoda. To be more specific, the con- sistently larger left valves found in the Prionodonta, Pteriacea, and Isognomonidae give an indication of relationship which is also borne out by other morphological characters. However, some caution must be exercised as to the interpretation of valve inequality in groups which have tew inequi- valve species, such as the mytilids and 62 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES PELECYPOD TAXA HAVING INEQUIVALVE REPRESENTATIVES Taxa The larger valve Aristerella right Cyrtodontidae! (Heikea) right Antipleuridae left right Cypricardinia right Dexiobia right Pterineidae left Leiopteriidae left Myalinidae left Pteriidae left Mytilidae! left right Prionodonta left Bakevelliidae left Inoceramidae- left Isognomonidae left Vulsellidae! left? right Placunidae left Pectinacea (Paleozoic) left? right Pectinacea (Mesozoic, Cenozoic) left right? Propeamussiidae left Spondylidae right Plicatulidae right Limidae} right Ostreidae left Chondrodonta left Anomiidae left Dimyidae left Pulvinitidae (including Diploschiza) left Pinnidae! (Trichites) left? right Unionacea! (Aetheriidae) left right Carditidae! left right Dreissenidae! right Rudistacea left right Lucinidae! left right Chamidae left right Veneraceal left right2 Tellinidae left right Semelidae left? right Sanguinolariidae right Pleuromyidae right Corbulidae right Myidae! right Cleidothaeridae right Myochamidae left right Pandoridae left Lyonsiidae left Thraciidae right Periplomatidae right Poromyidae right Verticordiidae right Cuspidariidae left Juliidae right 1 Basically equivalve. 2 Valve which is either more commonly the larger or more conspicuously so or both. VOL. 48, NO. 2 carditids. The few cases of inequal valves in these two groups undoubtedly mean little or nothing as an indication of phyletic rela- tionships. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS I am particularly indebted to three per- sons for data and suggestions for this study. Dr. Roland W. Brown, of the U. 8. Geolog- ical Survey, provided information on the spelling of some of the family names. Dr. Harald A. Rehder, of the U. 8S. National Museum, examined the manuscript for the usage and spelling of the pelecypod taxa. Dr. Horace B. Baker, of the University of Pennsylvania, pointed out Lamy’s interest- ing paper. REFERENCES Corton, B. C., and Goprrry, F. K., The molluscs of South Australia, Part I. The Pelcypoda: 314, 340 text figs. Adelaide, 1938. Cox, L. R. The English wpper lias and inferior oolite species of Lima. Proc. Malacol. Soc. London 25: 151-187, 79 figs. 1943. ——— Taxonomic notes on Isognomonidae and Bakevelliidae. Proc. Malacol. Soc. London 31: 46-49, 1 fig. 1954. IsBERG, ORVAR. Studien uber Lamellibranchiaten des Leptaenakalkes in Dalarna: 492, 32 pls. Lund, 1934. Lamy, E. Quelques mots sur la torsion de la coquille chez les lamellibranches. Journ. de Conch. 74 (2): 128-151, 21 figs. 1930. La Rocqun, A. Pre-Traverse Devonian pelecypods of Michigan. Contrib. Mus. Pal. Univ. Michi- gan 7 (10): 271-366, 19 pls. 1950. NEWELL, N. D. Late Paleozoic pelecypods: My- tilacea. Geol. Surv. Kansas 10 (2): 115,15 pls., 22 figs. 1942. NEweELL, N. D., and Mercuant, F. E. Discordant valves in pleurothetic pelecypods. Amer. Journ. Sci. 287 (8): 175-177, 1 pl., figs. la-d. 1939. Nicout, D. Morphology of Astartella, a primitive heterodont pelecypod. Journ. Pal. 29: 155-158, 4 figs. 1955. Utricu, E. O. The Lower Silurian Lamellibranchi- ata of Minnesota: 475-628, pls. 35-42. (In ‘‘The Geology of Minnesota’’ 3 (2): of Final Report, Paleontology.) 1897. FEBRUARY 1958 ACTIVITIES OF THE JOINT BOARD ON SCIENCE EDUCATION 63 ACTIVITIES OF THE JOINT BOARD ON SCIENCE EDUCATION Eprror’s Nore: Most members of the Academy are familiar with the name Joint Board on Science Education, but untortu- nately few are familiar with its activities. Dr. Arnold H. Scott has kindly prepared this report on the Joint Board. Following this is a report by the Joint Board on a problem of interest to all scientists. As early as 1949 the Washington Academy of Sciences became concerned about the need for encouraging the study of science and mathe- matics in the junior and senior high schools of the Greater Washington Area. Keith Johnson and Percy Rayford, of the District of Columbia Schools, had organized the first annual science fair for the Washington Area in 1947 and had begun asking the Academy for help in judging the entries. In 1951 a special committee was formed by the Academy with Dr. Martin A. Mason as chairman to organize a Junior Acad- emy of Sciences. Upon its organization in 1952 the Junior Academy assumed the responsibility for promotion of the annual science fairs. By 1951 some of the scientific and engineering societies had become concerned with the promo- tion of science education, and the schools were being contacted by the various societies who were wanting the privilege of presenting their pro- grams to the students and working with them in the schools. As the work load of the teachers was heavy and the schedules rather tight, these re- quests from the societies for time became irksome to the school officials. It became clear to the D. C. Council of Engineering and Architectural Societies that something must be done to coordi- nate the activities of the societies and to estab- © lish better relations with the schools. Harly in 1952 Dr. W. T. Read, chairman of the Education Committee of the Council, took the first steps toward coordinating the efforts of the societies. He set up a Subcommittee for Secondary School Contacts with Walter H. McCartha as chairman, which secured approval of the school systems for the contact members to work with the science and mathematics teachers on behalf of the various societies wishing to help in encouraging the study of science and mathe- matics. The Washington Academy of Sciences was asked to join in this effort by appointing a parallel Subcommittee for Secondary Schools Contacts. This subcommittee was appointed with Dr. Arnold H. Scott as chairman. The first an- nual “List of Officials and Committees concerned with the Promotion of Science Talent’? was pub- lished in the fall of 1952. At first the teachers and school officials were suspicious of the efforts of the scientists and engineers, as they were afraid that an effort would be made to try to change their methods of teaching. However, the early efforts of the con- tact members were very tactful, and the teachers soon came to realize that the contact members could be really helpful to them. The influence and size of the contact committee grew rapidly. The parallel efforts of the Washington Junior Acad- emy of Sciences in promoting science fairs in the schools resulted in a rapid growth of interest by the students in the fairs. It then became apparent that a more formal coordinating organization was needed. Under the active direction of Dr. Margaret Pittman, then president of the Academy, the Joint Board on Science Education was formed in 1955 by an agreement between the Washington Academy of Sciences and the D. C. Council of Engineering and Architectural Societies. Its first chairman was Dr. Raymond Seeger. It was em- powered to direct its activities “‘toward assisting and counseling the faculties of schools and related organizations, with power to initiate action where desirable, and to raise funds to carry out the various activities of the Board.’ These ac- tivities include: ‘1. Providing such speakers as may be desired. 2. Arranging for classroom demonstrations. 3. Assisting in developing graduate school op- portunities for science teachers and aiding them in finding summer employment. 4. Recommending changes in science courses when deemed advisable. 5. Sponsoring local area fairs and assisting in planning, and promotion of same.” The Board consists of 12 members, 6 appointed by the chairman of the Council and 6 appointed 64 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES by the president of the Academy. The terms of office are three years, two members being ap- pointed each year from each of the parent organi- zations. The official year starts on June 1, and the new officers are elected at the first meeting of the new year. The chairman is chosen alter- nately from the members of the Academy and the Council. The Board has been incorporated so as to establish responsibility and provide for tax exemption on donations made to the budget of the Board. Each committee of the Board is headed by two members from the Board, one from the Academy and one from the Council. Other members of the committees are recruited from interested persons in the various scientific and engineering societies. The Secondary Schools Contacts Committee is the largest committee of the Board and is com- posed of some 135 persons who act as contact members to the junior and senior high schools of the Metropolitan Washington Area (within a radius of 25 miles of central Washington). There is one contact member for each junior and senior high school of the area with a few exceptions. Because of the size of the committee and magni- tude of the work to be done, the committee has been divided into eight divisions, roughly paral- leling the school systems involved. The contacts committee serves as a channel through which the various scientific and engineering societies can aid the teachers and also as a channel through which the science and mathematics teachers can call on the talents of the members of the scientific and engineering societies. The work of the Contacts Committee is planned and reviewed by a Planning Committee, which is composed of the chairman and vice- chairman, the Division chairmen, and the school haison officers. The latter are persons appointed by the school systems to work with the Joint Board. It is the duty of the contact member to make the acquaintance of the science and mathematics teachers in his school so that they may feel free to call upon him for whatever help he can give. He is prepared to help in getting speakers for career days, science clubs, school assemblies, etc. He can help in getting scientific films for use in schools and in getting volunteers for project judging, project counseling and other work con- nected with science fair operations. The contact member is expected to make sure that there has been no failure of the school and students to receive information about the special scientific VOL. 48, No. 2 lectures which are presented each year especially for the high-school students and to help when necessary in obtaining the necessary tickets for these lectures. It is the stated policy of the Joint Board that once each year, if the schools desire it, scientists shall be brought into the classrooms to discuss their work in science and engineering with the purpose of creating interest in these subjects. When such a program has been planned and arranged between the Joint Board and the school system, it is the duty of the con- tact member to see that all the requests have been filled, that both the teacher and the scientist or engineer are well informed of what is expected of each, and that the program works smoothly in his school. Three such programs have been car- ried out and have received a very enthusiastic response. A meeting in honor of the Secondary Schools Contacts Committee members for their faithful work with the schools was held on October 14, 1957. Remarks of appreciation were made by Dr. John K. Taylor, chairman of the Joint Board, Dr. Arnold H. Scott, chairman of the Secondary Schools Contacts Committee, and Dr. T. Ed- ward Rutter, division superintendent of the Arlington Public Schools. A feature of the meet- ing was a preview of the film entitled “The Strange Case of the Cosmic Rays,” which is the third of the Bell System Science Series. The film was introduced by Dr. Ralph Bown, chairman of the Scientific Advisory Board of the Bell System Science Series and former vice chairman-Research of the Bell Telephone Laboratory. The Committee on Science Fairs was organized to act as a general coordinating body for science fair problems. It works with the school staffs and the Washington Junior Academy of Sciences by: 1. Advising on ground rules, 2. Advising on policy matters, 3. Aiding in securing proper consultants for projects (this is usually a matter of assisting the School Contact Members when necessary), 4. Advising on safety problems as needed, 5. Aiding in securing judges, 6. Aiding in securing accessory support, par- ticularly special exhibitions in the Smithsonian Institution, National Institutes of Health, and tours of these and other government institutions such as the National Bureau of Standards, 7. Aiding in the guidance of publicity, 8. Working with other groups such as the Prince Georges Science Fair Association, the Arlington County Science Fair Association, Science Associates of Montgomery County, and other similar groups and, FEBRUARY 1958 ACTIVITIES OF THE JOINT 9. Cooperating with other groups to raise the necessary money where such is not available from the School Boards. Four area science fairs are held each year. Two winners from each area fair are sent to the Na- tional Science Fair, along with one teacher from each area acting as chaperone. The Finance Committee is charged with preparing a budget for the Joint Board and seeking a means for raising the funds required for this budget. The budget for the present year is as follows: Expenses of chairman SINATRA. ee eee $125.00 Secondary School Contacts Committee. 400 .00 Science Fairs Committee: (a) Local Area Fairs... . $1,200 doymeNetitonaly Mair: ... 1... 2,500 3,700.00 Science Teacher demonstration BAAS | 2 Ss 55 RC Oe ete eee eae 525.00 imancemOomimibtee. . 64 2) Jka. ee. 200.00 IMPS CAMA TAS CIS ce eee 590 .00 $5, 500.00 Money to support this budget is expected from the scientific, engineering, and architectural so- cieties, commercial organizations in the area, certain service organizations, and individual do- nations. In the past the Washington Junior Academy of Sciences has liberally supported the budget by its donations from the funds received from the scientific trips which it sponsors. Many more individual donations are needed if the bud- get is to be adequately supported. A curriculum committee has made a study of the scientific curriculum of a local school system at the request of an official of that system. A report of this committee has been made available to all the school systems of the Washington Area who desire it. Members of the Joint Board on Science Education and its Committees Joun K. Taytor, Chairman R. W. Mess, Vice Chairman W. H. McCarrua, Secretary-Treasurer CHARLES MorSEL ARNOLD H. Scorr RAYMOND J. SEEGER KATHERINE STINSON Lewis K. DowNING Wo. J. KLLENBERGER REGINA FLANNERY PHOEBE KNIPLING Wave H. MarsHALu Secondary Schools Contacts Committee ArNoxtp H. Scorr, Chairman W. J. ELLENBERGER, Vice Chairman BOARD ON SCIENCE EDUCATION Division I District of Columbia D. B. Scorr, Chairman R. J. Roru, Vice Chairman BERNARD W. AGRANOFF Keita C. JOHNSON Morris E. BArRFIELD Raupew E. CraBiuu STANLEY Dosik JosEPH J. FAHEY MicHEAL GOLDBERG Won. P. Harris JoHN K. Harrsock NorMan C. HoweE.Lus Wn. D. JENKINS GERSHON KULIN Rospert H. NELSON Won. H. PINDELL, JR. GEORGE B. Scorr C. M. SmitH Wawupvo E. SMITH Ecpert H. WALKER LAWRENCE A. Woop Division II District of Columbia L. K. Downine, Chairman A. KE. Ricumonp, Vice Chairman EVELYN Boyp RayYMoND M. JONES LAWRENCE T. BuRWELL J. I. Minor, JR. Francis EH. BUTLER STEPHEN S. Davis Hauson V. HAGLESON Liuoyp FERGUSON Haroup E. FINLEY DaRNLEY E. Howarp ARTHUR D. JEWELL A. F. Moore, JR. Kewtso Morris Francis W. STEELE I, dis WANE J. C. WEBSTER CHARLES E. WEIR Division III Prince Georges and Charles Counties GROVER C. SHERLIN, Chairman Hasima Ora, Vice Chairman JosEpH G. Tuono, Vice Chairman WriuuiaM J. BAILEY ALBERT F. BriRD Cart BoyarRs W. O. BRIMIJOHN Ricuarp L. DoLEcEK Rosert J. Downs JAMES F. Fox Epwarp HacskKAYLo Rospertr A. HEIN WaRREN I}. HENRY Lester F. HuBERT W. H. Hunt Wn. H. LuckE Bruce NEALE, JR. 65 M. F. Maury OSBORNE JOHN G. PALMER STANLEY PRUSCH A. I. SCHINDLER Mary S. SHORB K. M. Smite JOHN K. TaYLorR C. G. THomMpeson R. B. TURNER GEORGE W. WALDO GEORGE F. WALL CORR I Wise. ir. EvizaBetH G. ZooK Division IV Montgomery County FALCONER SmitH, Chairman Rospert B. Moore, Vice Chairman JAMES CASSELL ERNEST CoTLOVE WaLTER T. DANIELS Jeeves DATS lefeddy Te isiauie B. K. ForscHE Howarp GRAHAM O. R. HAMILTON Ricuarpv [IRWIN LEON JACOBS ArcHIE I. MAHAN Louise MARSHALL R. D. MuURRILL Wriitram R. Nes Ricuarp L. PETRITZ LEE. J. PURNELL J. L. ROBERTSON ABRAHAM SHANES Haroup R,. STANLEY GILBERT WRIGHT 66 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Division V Arlington County and Alexandria T. F. Forp, Chairman J. M. CaLpwELL, Vice Chairman ALLEN L. ALEXANDER KENNETH HAINES Rocco DE MasI R. S. Hunter Auton H. DESMON LUTRELLE F. PARKER Wo. H. DIEHL J. A. SANDERSON JOHN HAGEN W. ZimmerRMAN, III Division VI Falls Church, Fairfax and Prince Williams Counties C. R. Nasser, Chairman J. W. Harkness, Vice Chairman WitL H. SHEARON, JR. C. R. TREADWELL Horace M. TRENT B. D. Van EVERA Harry J. BOERTZEL VeRA CONRAD B. Tuomas HopxKINs P. W. Kopp Lucien L. Ricu Division VII Catholic Schools JosepH C. Micuatowicz, Chairman CHARLES C. D1ILuLER, Vice Chairman VOL. 48, No. 2 GEORGE E. McDuFrrigE JoHN C. OEHMANN ALBERT J. WALCEK Division VIII Private Schools MarGaret R. Fox, Chairman E. C. Curcuins, Vice Chairman Mary E. STEVENS T. DaLe STEWART EarRLeE R. ToENSE Epwarp W. TorPFrER Howarp R. Bau ELIZABETH DOYLE Won. J. KaNnor Marrua L. RIc& STANLEY B. RUSSELL Science Fairs Committee W. H. MarsHatu, Chairman R. W. Mess, Vice Chairman CuHarRuEs A. McCatua PauL R. MILLER Howarp B. OwENS KarRuL FRANK STEPHEN HopxKINS PHOEBE KNIPLING JESSE L. Maury Finance Committee © C. MorsEL, Chairman PHOEBE KNIpPLING, Vice Chairman A REPORT BY THE JoINT BoAaRD ON SCIENCE EDUCATION IN THE GREATER WASHINGTON AREA SCIENCE CURRICULA IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS About a year ago the Joint Board was invited by a local school system to make recommenda- tions on science curricula in secondary schools. After a brief, intensive study, based upon an ex- tensive background of experience of the science community, the following report was submitted by a special Science Education Committee. The requesting group is of the belief that the general recommendations may be of value to other schools with similar problems; accordingly, the Board has been authorized to make its views known to all the schools under the Greater Washington Area. Recognizing that the problem of science teaching is of great concern, both nationally and internationally, and not merely of a local char- acter, the Science Education Committee recom- mends schools continue to study vigorously the revision of its curricula in mathematics and science at the secondary-school level with the following principles in mind: FUNDAMENTALS Outside a genuine need to interest all capable secondary-school students in the scientific aspects of the universe in which we all live, most college scientists of all disciplines are agreed that the primary requirement for college is general prepa- ration in reading, writing, and arithmetic (the 3 R’s), stressed at all grades from kindergarten through the secondary school, with particular emphasis upon mathematics and its relationship to the sciences, and not merely the specific courses in the sciences. Of paramount importance is the motivation of students through enthusi- astic, content-informed teachers. The need to challenge intellectually the competent, as well as to safeguard the right of the slow-to-learn, must be a primary concern of all engaged in a demo- cratic educational system. GUIDANCE Guidance about the professions is needed for ‘“ouidance personnel.” So-called guidance, at FEBRUARY 1958 present, seems to be concerned mostly with in- forming students as to what they should do if their careers or colleges have already been se- lected. Much more important is insuring that the student has an opportunity to select among eareers those in which he has a particular interest and potentiality, even if both are latent. Local scientists are available through the Joint Board on Science Education for general presentations to guidance personnel and_ for specific assistance to individual students, as well as for group talks. DEPTH AND BREADTH A greater emphasis is needed upon depth of understanding a few principles of science rather than upon an encyclopedic coverage of many topics about science. The student needs to know much more than just facts of science; he needs to understand primarily ‘“‘the why,’ secondarily “the how,” and only thirdly “the what.” At all grades, from the kindergarten through the sec- ondary school, science should be taught, not chiefly to acquire “information, please,’ but primarily to stimulate curiosity and to implement interests through well-selected facts, as a means —not an end in itself. The criterion of success should be whether or not a student is able to think and behave differently about the scientific material of his environment at the conclusion of his course. Above all, he should be made familiar with both the power and the limitations of science. COURSE OBJECTIVES Each course should have clearly stated, prac- ticable objectives, including the means of measur- ing such objectives. Evidence should be annually shown as to the measured success of achievement of such objectives. Critical objective analysis should be continually made of all administrative procedures, which may prevent the optimum realization of teaching objectives. EXPERIMENTATION IN COURSES The secondary schools should develop objec- tives of their own without undue regard for opinions of high school teachers as to what they believe is, or should be, truly college preparatory. In this connection, the requirements and use of high-school subjects by colleges and universities nationally should be continually examined, par- ACTIVITIES OF THE JOINT BOARD ON SCIENCE EDUCATION 67 ticularly in consultation with local scientists. Serious consideration should be given to the ordering of courses, including possible modifica- tion of traditional arrangements; for example, the order of physics and chemistry which in high school is sometimes opposite to that usually found in colleges; the giving of algebra as a 2-year sequence rather than having it interrupted by geometry, which may be (or should be) little used in later secondary physics and chemistry classes. In this connection, it is noted that some peculiar choices may be accidentally given stu- dents; for example, the need to choose at a par- ticular time between a future required course (history) and one elective course (in biology). In this instance it would be preferable to give a choice among comparable subjects, say, a group of sciences or a group of social studies. Experimentation with new types of courses in mathematics, biology, chemistry and _ physics should be encouraged on an interschool basis by a few capable teachers of honor courses. Under no circumstances, however, should a radical change be made in the general program without considerable experimentation and the preparation of adequate texts. Promiscuous tampering with the bad material may affect good material also. Possible new courses are: (a) introductory courses in mathematical sciences, which involve the use of numerical analysis and the applications of mathematics to science; (b) introductory courses in physical science, which may combine present courses in physics and chemistry (one semester of each)—not a “survey” course; (¢) introductory courses in modern mathematics, including cer- tain fundamental concepts in algebraic geometry, elementary calculus, and statistics. Local scientists might be invited through the Joint Science Board on Education to participate in continuing studies of such science curricula. college There might be a series of round table discussions in which an equal number of scientists from a particular discipline in local universities would be invited to meet with an equal number of high- school teachers in that discipline, a_ selected number of these conferees might be invited to another round table in which some educational authorities, both within the local public school system and from neighboring groups, would also be invited to participate. 68 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES MODERN VIEWPOINTS All material should be presented to the student at his own psychological and intellectual levels. It should be presented, moreover, as living mathematics and science—that is, from a modern viewpoint of science as science with only minor consideration of technological importance, which would appear to be more appropriate in social study courses. (General science courses, indeed, should be more scientific and less social in emphasis.) LABORATORY Good laboratory work is regarded as being highly important. There is a serious question, however, as to how much of real value is being accomplished in single periods of instruction (in lieu of a double period), particularly when such periods may be arbitrarily shortened for various administrative reasons throughout the year. Here, above all, objectives should be continually examined and evaluations made annually. In this connection, more allowance should be made for a teacher to make ready for laboratory just prior to the class meeting. Sufficient time must be allowed in the class for the student to assemble simple (inexpensive) apparatus. There is a tendency in a large class to mechanize all operations in order to achieve efficiency, whereas the sine qua non of all laboratory work should be encouragement of the individuality of each VOL. 48, NO. 2 student. Consideration should be given to differ- ent patterns for different types of students; for example, voluntary science-fair projects for the more imaginative (not all), laboratory repetition of demonstrations for the less imaginative (not all), ete. IN-SCIENCE TRAINING In view of the increasing complexity of modern science, it is recommended that in-service train- ing groups be established at all levels of mathe- matics and science teaching, but particularly at the elementary levels. Equally important as new factual information are new ways of presenting old basic materials. Local scientists might be invited through the Joint Board on Science Edu- cation to assist in such courses. Science Education Committee: R. Percy BARNES Professor of Organic Chemistry Howard University Matcoum W. OLIPHANT Professor of Mathematics Georgetown University GrorceE W. WHARTON Professor of Zoology University of Maryland Raymonp J. SEEGER (Chairman) Deputy Assistant Director National Science Foundation Men should be taught as if you taught them not, And things unknown proposed as things forgot. — Popr. 17 CONTENTS GENERAL ScreNcE.—A critique of operations research. GrorcGE E. GTI Raden es a ees he Se ae ee te ae vicice: Page PuysioLoGy.—Observations on the oxygen consumption of young Australorbis glabratus. ALINA PERLOWAGORA-SZUMLEWICZ and THEODOR VON BRAND?. 228-20. .ds5c6 a ees. eer PALEONTOLOGY.—A pelycosaur with subsphenoidal teeth from the lower Permian of Oklahoma. Prrer PAuL VAUGHN...............22% ZooLocy.—Sarsiella tricostata, a new ostracod from San Francisco Bay (Myodocopa: Cypridinidae). Merrerpiru L. JONES............... ZooLocy.—Description of a new species of Cossura (Annelida: Poly- chaeta) from the Mississippi Delta. Donaup J. REISH........... Zootogy.—A survey of inequivalve pelecypods. Davin Nicou........ Activities of the Joint Board on Science Education................... Notes and) Newsy 22 eee ee sa OE he bee rrr 22.W23 VOLUME 48 March 1958 NUMBER 3 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ceeneeecercercertr ATLL ar ae ee a | ee MA ieee SoH je Taal PRA BEI TEE MEE LL { Published Monthly by the meer SHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD. Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences Editor: Cuzester H. Pages, National Bureau of Standards Associate Editors: RonALD BaMrorp, University of Maryland Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health IMMANUEL ESTERMANN, Office of Naval Research This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed- ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond- ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien- tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type- written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. ; Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in finai form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and $2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com- plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each. Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored, the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against unusual typographica! costs. Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author. Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PrRoceEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year..........:...:-----32seee $7 .50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, inel.—not, available*....... 02.22.25. — — Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 47, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $393.50. Monocrapn No. 1, ‘“The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50 INDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS........................-. $7 .50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete..........................05. $25.00 Single volumes, wnboUnd:)). 2220205025. 5 5aoe yee sae ses a eee 2.00 Single mummers es s-iici dob ee eine ce eee eee ee ee Prices on request Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and ae aaa to the Treasurer, H. S. Raprieye, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12, Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md. Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vot. 48 Marcu 1958 No. 3 HISTORY OF SCIENCE.—Ferdinand Hassler’s gift to America. Exuiorr B. Roserts, U. §. Coast and Geodetic Survey. (Received December 27, 1957) *** In ridicule and humiliation he pursued his goal of giving the people of his adopted land a service of lasting value; however his true gift was not the labors to which he sacrificed himself, but the spirit and ideals still cherished by his followers. It was not common in Ferdinand Hassler’s _ sophical Society, after submitting the best of day for public officials to argue with the several plans for the work. President about their salaries, but Hassler Hassler was born in 1770 of a prosperous was no common man. He was a genius who watchmaking family of Switzerland. His gave life to two of the country’s most early interest in mathematics and astronomy honored scientific services a century and a brought him to Johann Tralles, a leading half ago, and he wanted to be paid accord- _geodesist who was applying the principles of ingly. When he asked President Jackson in higher surveying to the mapping of Switzer- 1836 for $6,000 a year, he was rebuked—this land to promote better land utilization and was as much as his superior, the Secretary development. Among the problems facing of the Treasury, received. To this Hassler Tralles and his pupil was the development of had a scornful and to him a perfectly logical _ precise instruments and measurement stand- reply—secretaries of the Treasury could ards, preoccupations that made Hassler a be found anywhere, and could by made by _ lifelong instrumentalist. Out of such begin- any President, whereas there was but one nings grew his passion for precision and Hassler. Only God Almighty could make a_ orderly procedure. Raised in affluence. he Hassler! He got the money, and the country never developed a money sense, nor practical got two scientific bureaus, the Coast and attitudes toward life’s problems. He had a Geodetic Survey and the National Bureau studious appearance with penetrating eyes. of Standards, which still operate under a He never wore glasses—instead he became code of ethics that cannot be evaluated in a habitual snuff user, “to stimulate the dollars. optic nerve”’ as he said. America, still young at the turn of the In his scientific development young nineteenth century, was seeing a tremendous Hassler traveled widely, never hesitating to maritime growth. Almost all commerce was _ present himself to such eminent scientists as by coastal shipping, and 60,000 vessels of Lalandeand Lavoisier, and to leading philos- that trade sustained crippling losses be- ophers and historians. This self-assurance cause they had no charts of the coast. Amer- impertinence in a lesser man—beecame a ica’s growth was threatened. When Congress _ lifelong trait. He made a uniformly favorable faced up to this situation in 1807 by author- impression, gaining a prestige in Europe that izing a survey of the coast, Ferdinand was lacking later in the relatively rough Hassler was the only man in America with — society of early America. the technical knowledge to undertake the In the last years of the century political work. Thus he became its first head, on the troubles interfered with the work he liked, recommendation of the American Philo- and led him into public affairs. He displaved 69 SMITH GTS ONIAN MAY ¢ ©8 4ARea 70 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES original and constructive ideas in administra- tion and education, and became Attorney General of Switzerland. Life, however, was distasteful, leading him to emigrate to Amer- ica with his family in 1805. He dreamed of America as a refuge where he could farm in ease and comfort, indulging in reflection and study. He even organized a colonizing scheme and brought with him 120 immigrants to form a new community. Unfortunately, financing all this led him into commitments with associates who not only brought the scheme to grief—they also lost much of his fortune for the young crusader, and ruined his farming dream. With him Hassler brought furniture, art objects, standards of weight and measure, and a library of 3,000 volumes on all aspects of natural science as then known. That col- lection, brought for his personal satisfac- tion, was destined later to be sold, little by little, during long periods of reversal, but this was not at first apparent. He promptly obtained citizenship, and got in touch with scientific men, who were captivated by his sincerity and earnestness, his five languages and cosmopolitan air, the novelty of his library, and by his dona- tion of scientific curiosities to the American Philosophical Society. Among his new friends were Prof. Robert Patterson, director of the Mint, who recommended him to President Jefferson for a job as surveyor or astronomer, and John Vaughan, a public-spirited Phila- delphian, who also wrote Jefferson of “one of the most interesting foreigners we have for a long time had among us.”’ Jefferson, who liked to read scientific papers before learned societies, and who looked on science as the cornerstone of the Republic, quickly became a friend of the young Swiss. This association, and the urgings of Patterson and Vaughan, led to an executive recommendation resulting in a Congressional authorization of $50,000 for a survey of the coast. Hassler’s plan for the work was based on simple logic. Starting from astronomical positions of ‘remarkable’ points of the coast and a triangulation survey to join them in a rigorous system of control, he would then—and only then—make a _ nautical survey of the shoals and coastal waters. VOL. 48, NO. 3 If Hassler had any clear conception of the enormous size of this undertaking, he did not advertise it. Certainly Congress thought the matter would soon be concluded, and felt the money appropriated to be liberal in the extreme. Hassler, to support himself, had mean- while taken a $1,500 professorship of mathe- matics at West Point that was to last three years while the Administration temporized over starting the survey. There he began a text which displayed a new analytical approach to the study of trigonometry. He wrote a paper on meteorites, and he observed a comet ‘‘of extreme beauty.” He was widely admired, and he made friends among stu- dents who later became his aides on the survey and lifelong supporters. He spent much time preparing detailed plans of instruments and procedures, and in writing letters urging haste upon the administration. In 1810, despite protest earned by his stimulating teaching methods, he was forced out of West Point by a ruling that the Army lacked authority to employ civilian teachers. He left a sundial on a rock near the house he had occupied, like one he had placed as a boy in his native town in Switzerland. It remained many years. He next took an appointment at Union College, which, though it lasted but a year, left such an impression that the president of the college could say, in 1843 at Hassler’s death, “We have not such another man to die.” His impoverishment during these years of low salaries meant little to Hassler, who sold his books one by one, living for the day when his great work would begin. His wite, who loved society and fine living, found it a dismal period. Early in 1811 Treasury Secretary Gallatin found it possible to proceed, and Hassler joyfully left Union College to begin the survey. He had previously written that the work could not be done without tools—and none were available in America. In his words, ‘“‘Good instruments are never to be obtained by buying in shops, where only instruments of inferior quality are put up to sell; they must be made on command, and by the best mechanicians (of London).” So it was that he went to Europe to procure the theodolites and other instruments, and FERDINAND HASSLER ie, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES to find copper for the chart engravings—in- deed the engravers themselves would have to be recruited in Germany. He had new instruments of his own design built in London, including a revolutionary “oreat theodolite”’ for measuring angles of the survey. He collected reference books, new standards of measurement, and other necessities, and he visited the continent to discuss his plans with leading scientists. All this forced delay, particularly since war intervened, and the mission lengthened into years. In his zeal he personally paid obliga- tions of the United States, and of his official funds he overspent the $50,000 allowed him by Congress. This brought severe censure, and he had to return home at his own ex- pense—bringing to America a collection of instruments said to be the best ever to leave England. Actual operations were delayed still further for many reasons, including lack of funds, until 1816. Then he was finally appointed superintendent, with a salary of $3,000 and an expense allowance of $2,000 —not enough for the improvident Hassler, who had to continue drawing on his own resources, finally going to the President with his money problems. He later reported, “‘I resigned the certain and respectable position of professor ... at Union College ... to em- bark in a work in which the disagreements and pecuniary losses have by far exceeded my compensations.” The first work in the field was in prepara- tion for surveying the area about New York. Instrument supports were built before the actual appropriation of funds. Practically at the outset, arrangements for the measure- ment of a baseline near Long Branch were interrupted by the first of a long series of controversies—in this case a lawsuit about branches of a cedar bush used as a survey signal. Hassler had to ask for papers of public authority. Hassler constructed a carriage ingeniously arranged to safeguard his “great theodolite”’ in transit, as well as to provide compart- ments for books and papers and _ personal conveniences. This effective but strange conveyance attracted great attention, doubt- less contributing to Hassler’s growing repu- tation as an eccentric. Congress was never VOL. 48, NO. 3 reconciled to the expenditure of official funds for such a monstrosity. In early 1817, before a year had passed, Hassler was asked by the Secretary of the Treasury for an estimate of the time and cost of completion of the proj- ect! The communication hinted of Congres- sional impatience and the possibility of action to terminate the project. This was preposterous! He was hardly begun! Clearly Washington was utterly ignorant in such matters, so he tried to explain. Much preparatory work had to be done. A precise geodetic survey based on astronomic observations must precede the nautical survey. The chart must show all details of the shoreline and the landmarks, requiring laborious operations along every bit of the coast. All this must- come first. Hassler worked desperately to impress Congress. He told how diligent he had been: ‘‘I protracted the summer work till the end of December, when none about me thought it possible to stand it any longer for cold ...I have been up and at observa- tions with or before sunrise... taking out the results occupied me commonly till about eleven o’clock at night. All this was wit- nessed enough by every person about me.” Notwithstanding all his efforts, he could not satisfy Congress. Where he meant to build for the future, and to add lustre to American science, Congress wanted to satisfy the needs of the moment, and cheaply too. On April 14, 1818, a bewildered and uncomprehending Hassler was thrown out. There began a long period while Congress tried to get along without him—a period of almost complete inactivity. Shipwrecks con- tinued ! . Hassler, misunderstood and _ neglected, prepared a long paper of self-justification, later published by the Philosophical Society which gained him favorable attention, at least in Europe. Included was a brilliant proposal for the use of a polyconie projection for survey use in the technically difficult problem of portraying the curved earth on flat maps—a tool so perfect that it remains in use today. It was not long until another short-lived assignment appeared, in 1818, for which no one else could be found—an appointment as astronomer with the Commission demarking Marcu 1958 the Canadian boundary eastward from the St. Lawrence River, as ordained by the Treaty of Ghent. He repurchased and re- paired the famous carriage at a personal loss of $1,200. The first running of the line seemed to indicate the loss to Canada of a one-mile strip of farmland, containing two newly built United States forts. The farmers became incensed, apparently in distrust. of Hassler’s foreign origin and thick accent. He feared personal violence, but his tech- nical skill did not fail him. He propounded a new geodetic interpretation based on the lately discovered ellipticity of the earth. After protracted quarreling, he carried his point, and saved the disputed land for the country. This done, he left the boundary survey in a dispute over his salary and in humiliation over criticisms by the commis- sioner, who quite correctly but perhaps rudely called him quarrelsome. Thus Hassler went into a long eclipse. During a 10-year period he had to support himself as best he could. He wrote textbooks which earned him nothing, but which con- tained innovations of mathematical develop- ment. He lost teaching opportunities because it was fashionable to employ famous ‘‘con- tinental’’ professors. His resources ex- hausted, he tried farming, in pursuit of his dream of earlier years, but again he was cheated. He got no decent farm buildings, and he could not farm, but he lost his wife, who could not stand the isolation of country life. Disconsolate, dejected, and desperate, he sold more of his books, then he took menial jobs. But he never lost faith that one day he would return to his project. A more determined man has seldom lived than Ferdinand Hassler. He refused a flattering offer to go to Russia, saying that, though not paid in money, he would accomplish an invaluable labor for the American Re- public that would never perish. Finally, in 1830, Hassler received a com- mission that brought him back to public life, and led, through a series of unauthorized acts on his part, to the second of his great works for America—a service that eventually became the National Bureau of Standards. His fanatic devotion to the cause of correct measurement was well known—more signifi- cant, perhaps, was his possession of the best ROBERTS: HASSLER’S GIFT TO AMERICA 73 such standards in America. Congress, feeling that the nation’s international trade was in jeopardy because of the different concepts of pounds and bushels entertained by the various collectors of customs, ordered sets of standards to be furnished them—a good enough idea, but there were no standards! Treasury Secretary Ingham thereupon, on request of Congress, assigned Hassler to inspect and review the measures used in the customhouses. Much of man’s great advance in civiliza- tion has derived from his ability to measure —thus he learned to build, to navigate, and to trade. This early intellectual attainment had been so prostituted since the dawn of history, however, as to threaten the orderly development of commerce and _ industry. Standards were crudely defined, and lacked uniformity. Chiseling and cheating were rampant. Biblical injunctions for the use of righteous measures are many. Parliament, and later Congress, struggled with the problem through the centuries. George Washington pleaded for reform of weights and measures, but the interests of unprincipled merchants were too strong. In 1830 the sole official “standard” in the States was a copy, in a vault of the Treasury, of a yard-long brass rod established in Britain by the monarch about 1600, and later found to have been broken at an unknown time. Hassler instinctively despised any misuse of standards—probably he also appreciated the practical value of correct measures, whether for a yard of ribbon or a coastline. If Congress lacked initiative to enforce correct standards, not so Hassler! The terms of his commission meant vastly less to him than the demands of the situation. Without further ado, he set up shop, announced and promulgated standards, made and distrib- uted copies, and entirely without authority he constituted himself Superintendent of Weights and Measures. Far from confining himself to the customhouses, he extended his authority to all the Government depart- ments—even to the states. Congress, eventu- ally discerning what was going on, and pre- sumably relieved to be rid of the responsi- bility, urged him to hasten! In 1836 a resolution directed the Treasury Secretary to Oe: JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES do what Hassler had already done, and to use all the weights and measures already established as standards—established, that is, by Hassler! This achieved a stability that a thousand years of effort had not found. The results were far-reaching. Hassler’s weights and measures were copies, as precise as could be made, of those in England, and it was America’s singular privilege, upon the burning of Parliament in 1843, to make England a present of new ones copied from Hassler’s copies! The Office of Weights and Measures, child of Hassler’s initiative, remained in the office of Superintendent of the Coast Survey until 1901, when the National Bureau of Standards was formed. Much of the American story of technological advancement, mass production methods, and flourishing business based on trust in honest measures, has been directly due to Hassler’s work and to the honest and objec- tive scientific work since carried out by the Bureau of Standards in keeping with his traditions. Successful public service in connection with standards earned him a measure of public esteem, so that Congress, long since dismayed at the lack of progress on the survey of the coast, finally authorized Hassler’s reinstatement. This appointment was to last the rest of his life. On this oc- casion the Astronomical Journal saw fit to announce, “The editor cannot omit herewith to present to the Government of the United States his thanks, in which all men who take an interest in exact sciences will join him, for having taken up again this beautiful work, that had been begun by Mr. Hassler sixteen years ago. This work could certainly not be executed better by any other man than him, who in its beginning had already shown so much talent.” Operations began about 1832. Known in midcentury as the ‘Coast Survey,” the bureau eventually became the “Coast and Geodetic Survey”? when the nation-wide geodetic surveys started so painfully by Hassler in 1816 became recognized by engineers and mappers as fundamental to their work. In its long history the Survey has. established procedures looked on as definitive the world around, yet it has re- VOL. 48, NO. 3 mained small and little-known except to those it directly serves—doubtless as Hassler would have wished. The years of his later period were stormy. Among his high-handed practices was the witholding of charts needed by mariners until he could personally verify them. He remained proud and intolerant, drawing down antagonism on himself by his uncon- cealed scorn of official interference. In his code only scientists could evaluate the work of scientists. When an investigating commit- tee of Congress visited him, he sent them away with scathing denunciations of their presumption—giving rise to mirth in Con- eress, but little in the way of financial sup- port. This irascible man, nevertheless, brought hardened political and public opinion to his support in the end. By 1835 a foundation of survey control in the New York area permitted start of hydrographic work. The schooner Expert- ment and the brig Washington were the first of along line of survey ships that were to sail across the unknown seas that were to become vast indeed with the growth of the Republic. The labors of these sailing craft were plodding and slow, but to Hassler and all American mariners they represented the first fruits of the work authorized 28 years before. Everyone was impressed—even Congress —when many rocks and ledges were brought to light in the nearby waters of Long Island Sound. A dramatic discovery was the Gedney Channel approaching New York from the southeast by Sandy Hook, which eave rise to the interesting speculation that had the friendly French fleet known of it in 1778, a coup of major importance might have been executed against the British ships within. Hassler lived to see the first surveys done between Rhode Island and Delaware Bay, and the country soundly embarked on the course he had set, and his work appreciated. Some years after his death Sir R. I. Murchi- son characterized the Survey, before the Geographical Society of London, as “one of the most perfect exemplifications of applied science in modern times.” In 1879 Martha Lamb could say, in the language of the day in Harper’s Magazine, ‘In human progress within the present century there 1s no Marcu 1958 greater marvel than the operations of the Coast Survey.” All his life Hassler fought short-sighted men eager for quick, cheap results, heedless of lasting values. He won, teaching America some of the fundamental things we now take for granted. Science is based on truth and orderly development of ideas, not on short cuts. It is not political nor sectional, but universal and fundamental. Morale and interest are essential, and the scientific worker deserves a fair living and honor—not easily come by in Hassler’s time. It may be doubted that America was ever served by a more consecrated man. No one could doubt it who could have seen him night after night in his office, past midnight at a candle-lit table, checking computations, verifying charted soundings, or writing reports. He was doing work for which his ROBERTS: HASSLER’S GIFT TO AMERICA (2 appropriations did not provide workers, and seeing personally to the attainment of his own impeccable standards for the work. When he could spare himself from the office, or from the incessant demand of Congress for explanations, he endured the hardships of travel and field life, personally to perform the more important observations. In 1843, during a storm, Hassler, trying to protect one of his cherished instruments from the elements, fell in the darkness, in- juring himself on a projecting rock. Aged 73 years, and weakened by a lifetime of relent- less work, he died from this mishap. He died in pursuit of his vision, probably little realiz- ing how long enduring his example would be. In 1957,the one hundred and fiftieth anniver- sary of the survey of the coast, the realization became vivid indeed! a RR INTERACTION OF DIRECT AZO DYES IN AQUEOUS SOLUTION National Bureau of Standards research on the properties of materials is providing evidence of a fundamental relationship between the attach- ment of direct azo dyes to cotton and the chem- ical association of these dyes in mixtures.! The correlation results from a current study of spec- tral changes of organic dyes as caused by light, heat, and concentration variables. Partially spon- sored by the Air Force Office of Scientific Re- search, the program is being conducted by J. H. Gould and M. N. Inscoe of the NBS staff in collaboration with W. R. Brode, Associate Direc- tor of the Bureau. While the results apply pri- marily to changes in solution, they may provide a valuable basis for further investigations of dye adherence to fabrics. Direct, or substantive, azo dyes have a strong affinity for cellulose and adhere directly to the fibers when applied from a boiling neutral solu- tion. This is important in the textile industry since cotton is 99 percent cellulose and since the structure of rayon is also based on this funda- mental molecule. 1For further technical information, see The re- lation between the absorption spectra and the chem- ical constitution of dyes. XXIX, The interaction of direct azo dyes in aqueous solution, M. N. INscon, J. H. Goutp, M. E. Corninea, and W. R. Brops, Journ. Res. NBS 60:65. 1958. RP 2823. The behavior of direct dyes applied from dye baths containing mixtures of dyes often differs from that of the individual dyes. In general, the altered characteristics are attributed to interac- tion or complex formation between unlike mole- cules and include an increase in time to reach equilibrium, a decrease in the amount of one or both of the dyes absorbed at equilibrium, or a greater unevenness in the dyeing. When the absorption spectrum of a mixture of azo dyes in aqueous solution is not the same as the sum of the spectra of the individual com- ponents in separate solutions, the result is called a “non-additive’ tion curve is an inherent characteristic of the dye ) spectrum. Because the absorp- molecule, nonadditive spectra are indications of interaction. No spectral changes were noted when ageregation occurred at the concentrations used in this study. Aggregation is defined here as the complex association of like molecules. In the present experiments, 30 direct azo dves differing in aromatic components, number of azo eroups, and arrangement of substituents were studied in various combinations. To insure solu- bility in a water solution, all of these dyes were sulfonic acid (—SOsNa) derivatives. To obtain the graphie addition spectrum of two individual dyes, the two dyes in separate solu- 76 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES tions were measured simultaneously in the spec- trophotometer. Then, the same components were mixed and remeasured. If this latter spectrum was not the same as the initial spectrum, it was assumed that interaction had taken place. Although mixtures of direct dyes usually gave nonadditive spectra, there were two general situations in which additive spectra were ob- tained instead of the expected nonadditive curves. In the first of these, the steric hindrance by central sulfonic acid groups prevented interaction between the two dyes. This effect is caused either by the bulkiness of the acid groups, which could interfere with the close approach of the molecules of the dyes, or by the mutual repulsion between the like negative charges, which could also hinder the molecules from drawing near each other. Additive spectra were also noted when the terminal groupings on both components were identical or very similar. It is probable that inter- action may occur in such cases but does not produce marked spectral changes because of the similarity between the two dyes. Interaction in such a mixture is comparable to aggregation in a solution of the individual dye, and the degree of ageregation does not produce significant anoma- lous behavior with direct azo dyes. The acid azo dyes, as opposed to the direct azo dyes, do not adhere directly to cotton nor are they appreciably aggregated at higher concentra- tions or by inorganic salts. An acid dye generally contains a shorter conjugated chain (alternating double and single bonds) than does a direct dye. VOL. 48, NO. 3 The repulsion of the negatively charged sulfonic acid groups on the molecule and the increased solubility caused by these groups are effective in keeping the molecules separated. Because of these factors, the dyes show little tendency toward in- teraction in mixtures with the direct azo dyes. Basic dyes, e.g., methyl violet or methylene blue, as well as some substantive fluorescent brightening agents, were shown to give nonaddi- tive spectra in mixtures with various other dyes. The presence of foreign substances in the dye solution influences the state of aggregation of the dyes as well as their behavior in dyeing. The addition of inorganic salts increases aggregation of the dye as well as the amount of dye taken up by the fiber. Other substances may have an opposite effect. For example, pyridine inhibits the aggregation of azo dyes and also decreases the affinity of these dyes for cellulose to such an extent that it can be used as a “‘stripping”’ agent to remove the dye from the fiber. Such substances also influence the interaction of azo dyes in mix- tures. Alcohol and non-ionic detergents—both effec- tive in decreasing the aggregation of direct azo dyes—prevent interaction. Mixtures of dyes that normally give nonadditive spectra gave additive spectra in solutions containing 40 percent alcohol or 0.1 percent of a nonionic detergent. On the other hand, the addition of inorganic salts or a large increase in the dye concentration produced spectral changes which indicated greater associa- tion between the dyes. A naturalists life would be a happy one af he had only to observe and never to write.— CHARLES DARWIN. Marcu 1958 HUMES: ANTILLESIA CARDISOMAE WH ZOOLOGY .—Antillesia cardisomae, n. gen. and sp. (Copepoda: H arpacticoida) from the gill chambers of land crabs, with observations on the related genus Can- crinola. ARTHUR G. HuMgEs, Boston University. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) (Received July 22, 1957) Harpacticoid copepods living in the gill chambers of land crabs have been described from Jamaica and Louisiana, but little is known about these parasites in other regions of the Gulf of Mexico and the West Indies. Several persons, acknowledged be- low, have kindly supplied me with copepods from crabs of the West Indian and Gulf regions. Additional specimens have been recovered from crabs in the collection of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Har- vard University. This has made possible a redescription of certain features of Can- crincola jamaicensis Wilson and C. plumipes Humes, and the description of the new genus and species below. | This study was aided by a grant from the National Science Foundation. Cancrincola jamaicensis Wilson, 1913 This species was described from specimens taken from the gill chambers of Cardisoma guanhumi Latreille at Montego Bay, Jamaica. Since certain inadequacies and discrepancies exist in the original description, the type speci- mens were sought for study. Unfortunately, the type, U.S.N.M. no. 43506, has disappeared from its vial and can not be located. The paratypes, U.S.N.M. no. 32596, have dried up and are use- less for study. Other specimens of C. jamaicensis have been mentioned in published papers or listed in mu- seum collections, but these are probably not very Tehiable. Dr. A. 5S. Pearse collected copepods from Cardisoma guanhumi on July 15, 1931 (U.S.N.M. no. 69804) at Key West, Fla. These specimens, which he identified as C. jamaicensis, have unfortunately become dry and are of no use for study. On August 2, 1931, he found two copepods in Paguristes punctipes Benedict at Loggerhead Key, Tortugas, Fla. These, U.'S.N.M. no. 69811, are labeled C. jamaicensis. I have studied them and find that they do not belong to the genus Cancrincola, perhaps being acciden- ally present. On July 1, 19381, Dr. Pearse found copepods (U.S.N.M. no. 69807) in the gill cham- bers of Microphrys bicornutus (Latreille) at Tortu- gas, Fla. These were identified by him as C. jamaz- censis and are the specimens referred to by Wilson (1935) as living in this crab. I have examined the single specimen remaining in the vial and find that it is not a Cancrincola but rather another copepod accidentally present. Pearse (1951) listed C. j7ama- awensis from Gecarcinus sp., C. guanhumi, and Pa- nopeus herbstu H. Milne-Edwards at Bimini, Baha- mas. I have studied a specimen (U.S.N.M. no. 88572) from his Gecarcinus and find that it is neither Cancrincola nor the new genus to be described below. Other specimens (U.S.N.M. no. 88571) from his Cardisoma are not Cancrincola but belong instead to the new genus to be described on subsequent pages. Because of the mistaken identity of these copepods, casting doubt on the identification of Pearse’s now dried specimens from Key West and those from Panopeus at Bimini, it seems best to discount all records concerning C. jamaicensis in the preceding paragraph. The only well-sub- stantiated New World record to date is Wilson’s original collection at Montego Bay, Jamaica, made in the summer of 1910. Oswald N. Morris has sent me a single female Cancrincola taken from the gill chambers of a Cardisoma guanhumi collected on March 23, 1957, on the banks of the Barnett River near the Bogue Islands, Montego Bay, Jamaica. This specimen may be considered as a topotype. It measures 0.684 by 0.156 mm, and the measure- ments of leg 1 are: length and width of the first podomere of the endopodite 73 by I4u, length of the inner seta 61, length of the second podo- mere 24u, and length of the exopodite 59x. Dr. Peter F. Bellinger, of the University Col- lege of the West Indies, has sent me harpacticoid copepods from C. guanhumi taken in November 1955, and again in February and May 1956, on the mud flats at Port Henderson, St. Catherine, Jamaica. One of the two species in these lots resembles in all major respects Wilson's C. jamaicensts. Although these ean not be con 78 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES sidered as topotypes, they come from the same island and from the same host crab. In the ab- sence of type specimens or other comparative material and in view of the desirability of clarity- ing certain points in the original description, selected features of these C. jamaicensis from Port Henderson are described here. Female—The total length, including the caudal rami, based on five specimens, is 0.691 mm (0.624-0.815 mm). The greatest width of the thorax is 0.146 mm (0.144-0.150 mm). The aesthetask on the fourth podomere of the first antenna (Fig. 1) is 41u long (39-43y), based on seven specimens, tapering smoothly in its distal half, with no constriction. The single egg sac contains 10 eggs (8-13, based on 10 specimens). The average measurements, based on three speci- mens, of leg 1 (Fig. 2) are: length and width of the first podomere of the endopodite 73 by 14, length of the inner seta 62u, length of the second podomere 22, and length of the exopodite 63u. Leg 5 (Fig. 3) lacks the minute setae on the margin of the inner expansion. The lengths of the long setae on the inner expansion of the basal podomere and on the distal podomere are as follows (beginning with the outermost): DistaL PODOMERE 20h 52 33 56 92 18-21p 48-55 31-35 53-57 INNER EXPANSION 52 85 33 29 22 48-57 80-88 32-34 28-31 21-22 Instead of the condition described by Wilson, the armature of the caudal ramus is like that to be described below for C. plumzpes, the armature of the second antenna corresponds to that of (. plumipes, and the armature of legs 1 and 5 1s as indicated in Figs. 2 and 3. One may presume that these minute discrepancies are errors in the original description. In Wilson’s original description of C. jamaic- ensis the female is 0.8 by 0.175 mm and the male 0.88 by 0.17 larger than mm, measurements somewhat my measurements of Jamaican VOL. 48, NO. 3 specimens. The length of Wilson’s female falls within my size range, however. His male is larger than any that I have found. Furthermore, his male is even larger than the female, a condition not observed in any of the species of Cancrincola which I have studied. The size differences may be caused by Wilson’s measurements having been made on fresh and uncontracted specimens. Male.—The total length, including the caudal rami, based on three specimens, is 0.629 mm (0.586-0.715 mm). The greatest width of the thorax is 0.136 mm (0.134-0.140 mm). The first antenna has a small terminal hook. The aesthetask on the fourth podomere is 52u long (50-57u, based on seven specimens). Leg 3 (Fig. 4) has a relatively short middle seta on the end of the endopodite. Leg 5 (Fig. 5) has either five or six setae. If six, the two outermost are distally plumose, the next three setae are situated on the end of a small lamella, and the innermost is on a short pedicel. If five (Fig. 6), only two setae are on the lamella. A minute peglike pro- jection is often visible, though sometimes only with difficulty, on both sides of the lamella. Other specimens of C. jamaicensis have been sent to me from St. James, Barbados, by John B. Lewis, of the Bellairs Research Institute of McGill University. They were taken in No- vember 1955 from Cardisoma guanhumt. Dr. Robert L. Blickle has sent me specimens of C. jamaicensis collected on May 24, 1957, from C. guanhumi at Vero Beach, Fla. Through the courtesy of Dr. Dorothy E. Bliss I have collected C. jamaicensis from the same host crab sent to her from the Lerner Marine Laboratory of the American Museum of Natural History at Bimini, Bahamas. Although several specimens of Gecarcinus lateralis (Freminville) from the same locality were examined, no cope- pods were found, in spite of the Cardisoma in the region being heavily parasitized. Specimens of C. jamaicensis were washed out of the gill chambers of Cardisoma guanhumt in the collection of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard University. The crabs para- sitized were from Cannavieiras, Brazil (M.C.Z. no. All figures were drawn with the aid of a camera lucida. The letter following each figure title refers to the scale at which the figure was drawn. Fics. 1-3.—Cancrincola jamaicensis Wilson, female: 1, Aesthetask on the first antenna (B); 2, leg 1 (A); 3, leg 5 (C). Fias. 4-6.—Same, male: 4, Leg 4 (A); 9, leg 5 (B); 6, leg 5 (B). Fias. 7-10.—Cancrincola plumipes Humes, female: 7, First antenna (C); 8, mandible (B); 9, leg 1 (A); 10, leg 2 (A). We Oa NACE SS (ED ALY Ly hha fag we ee) eee wy, 80 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 5609), Pernambuco, Brazil (no. 5610), Grand Anse, Haiti (no. 5602), St. Kitts (no. 5604), Swan Island (no. 8659), and Bahia Honda, Cuba (no. 5601). The known distribution of Cancrincola jamatc- ensis is shown on the accompanying map. The copepod probably occurs throughout the range of the host crab, Cardisoma guanhumi, which Rathbun (1917) gives as ‘‘Bahamas, Southern Florida, West Indies, Texas to Sao Paulo, Brazil, and Bermudas.” The copepod parasitizes Cardt- soma armatum Herklots and Sesarma huzardt (Desmarest) in West Africa, where Humes (1957) reported it from several localities from Dakar to Pointe-Noire, as indicated on the map. Cancrincola plumipes Humes, 1941 Several hundred topotypes were collected from the gill chambers of Sesarma reticulatum (Say) in July 1941 at Grand Isle, La. Since the original description inadequately mentions certain fea- tures, supplementary notes are presented here. Female.—The first antenna and the rostrum are as indicated in Fig. 7. The aesthetask is 52u long (48-56u) with a noticeable constriction in its distal half. The mandible (Fig. 8) has a weakly subdivided palp bearing four terminal setae. Legs 1-4 have the following spine and setal formula: leg 1 leg 2 exp end exp end ist podomere 1:0 0:1 1:0 0:1 2d podomere ei 3 1:1 0:1 3d podomere 5 6 4 leg 3 leg 4 exp end exp end ist podomere 1:0 0:1 1:0 0:1 2d podomere eit 0:0 1:0 0:0 3d podomere 6 5 5 5 The average measurements (based on seven specimens) of leg 1 (Fig. 9) are: length and width of the first podomere of the endopodite 83 x 14u (81-844 X 14), length of the inner seta A2Qu (41-43), length of the second podomere 22u (21-23), and length of the exopodite 64u (62— 67u). Legs 2, 3, and 4 are as shown in Figs. 10, 11, and 12, respectively. Leg 5 (Fig. 13) has three minute peglike pro- jections on the margin of the distal podomere. The lengths of the setae on the inner expansion VOL. 48, NO. 3 of the basal podomere and the distal podomere are as follows (beginning with the outermost): DistaL PoDOMERE 194 38 28 51 116 18-20p 30-49 26-31 43-56 105-128 INNER EXPANSION 50 88 29 27 24 44-56 83-92 27-31 25-28 21-26 There are a few minute setae on the inner margin and the outer distal corner of the inner expansion. The caudal ramus (Fig. 14) is short, its width ereater than its length, with a single long terminal seta and smaller setae as indicated in the figure. Male.—The first antenna (Fig. 15) has a small terminal hook and three pectinate setae as shown in the figure. Leg 3 (Fig. 16) has a relatively short middle seta on the end of the endopodite. The spine and setal formula of legs 1-4 is like that of the female. Leg 5 (Fig. 17) has five setae, the two innermost distally plumose, the next two on a lamella, and the outermost pedicellate. The abdomen is 4-segmented. C. plumipes differs from C. jamaicensis in having a constriction in the distal half of the aesthetask on the first antenna, in the endopodite of leg 1 being relatively longer and its inner seta distinctly shorter, in having a few minute setae along the inner margin and at the outer distal corner of the inner expansion of leg 5 in the female, in the long setae on the inner expansion and distal podomere of leg 5 in the female being of somewhat different lengths, and in having two setae invariably on the lamella of leg 5 in the male. Other specimens of C. plumipes, recovered from S. reticulatum, have been sent to me by Marvin Wass from Alligator Harbor, on the northwest coast of Florida. This species was also recovered from washings of the gill chambers of S. reticulatum from Tiver- ton, Rhode Island (M.C.Z. no. 10936). The range of C. plumipes probably coincides with that of the host crab, which Rathbun (1917) gives as “from Woods Hole, Massachusetts, to Calhoun County, Texas.” C. plumipes has also been recovered from Sesarma cinereum (Bosc) at three localities. Over 100 copepods were found in the gill cham- Fries. 11-14.—Cancrincola plumipes Humes, female: 11, Leg 3 (A); 12, leg 4 (A); 13, leg 5 (C); 14, cau- dal ramus, ventral (C). Figs. 15-17._Same, male: 15, First antenna (C); 16, leg 3 (A); 17, leg 5 (B). Fires. 18, 19.—Antillesta cardisomae, n. gen. and sp., female: 18, Dorsal (F); 19, lateral (F). LSS PL LLE — 2 I9 s. 11-19.—(For legend see opposite p: FiaG 82 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES bers of 19 of these crabs at Bears Bluff, Wadma- law Island, 8. C., collected in June 1957 by G. Robert Lunz. These specimens show the features distinctive of C. plumipes but are smaller. The average total length of 10 females is 0.549 mm (0.504-0.600 mm) and of 10 males 0.544 mm (0.504-0.576 mm). The measurements of certain parts are proportionately smaller: aesthetask on the first antenna of the female 48u (42-53), first podomere of the endopodite of leg 1 of the female 71 x 14u (64-78u X 14y), its inner seta 35u (28-42u), second podomere 22u, exopodite of leg 1 of the female 60y (53-73). The setae of the fifth leg of the female are: 17, 93, 24, 45, 107, 48, 72, 27, 24, and 23, respec- tively. Two females from S. cinereum at Alligator Harbor, Fla., show variations in the spine and setal formula of the swimming legs. In both the exopodite of leg 1 is 1:0, 1:0, 5. The endopodite of leg 2 in one female is 0:1, 1:1, 3. Leg 4 in the oar 1s 20), igi. & ancl Mell, Weil, d: Nine females and 2 males from S. cinerewm at Jacksonville, Fla. (M.C.Z. no. 6208) conform closely to the specimens of C. plumipes from South Carolina. Presumably the copepod occurs throughout the range of Sesarma cinereum, which Rathbun (1917) gives as ‘from Chesapeake Bay (Arundel- on-the-Bay) to Tampico, Mexico.”’ Cancrincola longiseta Humes, 1957 Specimens of this copepod, known previously only from Goniopsis cruentata (Latreille) in West Africa, were recovered from the same host crab at Caruca, Rio Maria, Brazil (M.C.Z. no. 6167), Victoria, Brazil (6164), Santa Clara, Rio Mucury, Brazil (no. 8777), Pernambuco, Brazil (no. 6165), Rio de Janeiro, Brazil (no. 6168), Panama (no. 6160), Jeremie, Haiti (no. 6159), and the Bermudas (no. 8730). Apparently the copepod occurs throughout the range of the crab (“Ba- hamas and Gulf of Mexico to Province of Sao Paulo, Brazil; Bermudas; West Africa,’’ accord- ing to Rathbun, 1917). The accompanying map shows its known distribution, including the localities in West Africa cited by Humes (1957). VOL. 48, NO. 3 Antillesia, n. gen. Body elongated, cylindrical. No operculum. Caudal ramus nearly three times longer than wide, bearing terminally an inner long seta and an outer, short, pectinate, recurved seta. Rostrum minute and rounded. First antenna of female 8-jointed, without plumose setae; aesthetask on fourth podomere. First antenna of male 7- jointed and slightly prehensile, but lacking a terminal hook. Second antenna with a single- jointed exopodite. Mandible with a 2-jointed palp. First maxilla, second maxilla, and maxil- liped resembling in general those of Cancrincola. Leg 1 with a 2-jointed, prehensile endopodite distinctly longer than the 3-jointed exopodite. Both rami of legs 2, 3, and 4 three-jointed, the exopodites somewhat longer than the endopo- dites, with the spine and setal formula as given in the description below. Leg 3 in the male with next to outermost terminal seta of endopodite relatively very short. Leg 5 of the female with the basal podomere bearing five setae on the inner expansion and one outer seta, and the distal podomere having five setae, of which the next to the innermost is the longest. Leg 5 in the male with the basal podomere lacking the imner ex- pansion and bearing only the outer seta, and with the distal podomere having four terminal setae. Female genital field with a pair of phumose setae. Egg sac containing a single layer of eggs and carried with one narrow edge along the ven- tral abdominal surface. Abdomen (somites pos- terior to the genital) 4-segmented in both sexes. Type species—Antillesta cardisomae, N. sp. (The generic name alludes to the wide distribu- tion of the genus in the Antilles, and the specific name to the crab host.) Antillesia cardisomae, n. sp. Type material—More than 60 individuals representing both sexes, from the gill chambers of Cardisoma guanhumi Latreille collected in November 1955 on a mud flat at Port Henderson, St. Catherine, Jamaica, by Dr. Peter F. Bellinger. Holotype, allotype, and 28 paratypes (18 fe- males and 10 males) deposited in the United Fics. 20-31.—Antillesia cardisomae, n. gen. and sp., female: 20, Rostrum, dorsal (B); 21, genital seg- ment and abdomen, ventral (D); 22, caudal ramus, dorsal (A); 23, first antenna (C); 24, aesthetask on the first antenna (B); 25, second antenna (C); 26, labrum, ventral (B); 27, mandible (B); 28, oblique view of tip of the mandible (B); 29, first maxilla (B); 30, second maxilla (B); 31, maxilliped (B). 24 SCALE E. 0.5 MM = 2 om fo) uw WwW } < B) Ww AE amet ea , ‘aL Hen eS TUE yyuat N el Fires. 20-31. yw ee /) yi yn ayn (For legend see opposite page.) 84 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES States National Museum; the remaining para- types in the author’s collection. Female.—Total length, not including setae, based on eight specimens, 1.051 mm (0.900-1.272 mm). Greatest width of thorax 0.130 mm (0.112- 0.141 mm). Body (Figs. 18 and 19) colorless in aleohol. Rostrum (Fig. 20) minute, rounded, with two slender dorsal setae. Abdomen (Fig. 21) 4-segmented, with transverse rows of minute setae. Caudal ramus (Fig. 22) elongated, about 2.8 times longer than wide, bearing terminally a long inner seta (570m) and a shorter, slightly curved, unilaterally pectinate outer seta (135p), and four smaller setae as indicated in the figure. First antenna (Fig. 23) 8-jointed, the aesthe- task on the fourth podomere (Fig. 24) 40 long and extending only to the middle of the seventh. Second antenna (Fig. 25) with a very short basal podomere, a long middle podomere incompletely divided on the mid-inner margin and bearing a single-jointed exopodite tipped with three setae, and a terminal podomere having four setae and a spine distally, numerous small spines along its inner edge, and a low protuberance covered with short hairs at the outer distal corner. Posterior margin of labrum (Fig. 26) slightly dentate medially and pectinate laterally. Mandible (Fig. 27) with a swollen base, a 2-jointed palp having four distal setae, and an elongate, indis- tinctly bipartite blade showing a prominent anterior protuberance and distally (Fig. 28) three ventral teeth, a dorsal seta, and numerous smaller teeth between. First maxilla (Fig. 29) with a broad inner lobe having two slender, curved setae on its anterior surface and distally two broad pectinate setae plus several smaller ones; with two slender outer lobes and an external seta. Second maxilla (Fig. 30) terminating in a clawlike spine and a pectinate seta; other parts as indicated in the figure. Maxilliped (Fig. 31) 2-jointed, the first podomere bearing a distal swollen plumose seta, the second bearing ter- minally a long curved pectinate claw with a minute seta near its base. Rami of legs 1-4 3-jointed, except the 2-jointed endopodite of leg 1 (Fig. 32). Average measure- ments of leg 1, based on 10 specimens: length and width of the first podomere of the endopodite 98 x 18 (96-103u x 17-20u), length of the VOL. 48, NO. 3 inner seta 1024 (90-110u), length of the second podomere 20u (18-22), and length of the exopo- dite 68u (64-70u). Prominent groups of spines on the distal outer angles of the first and second exopodite podomeres of all four legs and of the second endopodite podomere of legs 2-4 (Figs. 33, 34, and 35). The spine and setal formula of legs 1-4 as follows: leg 1 leg 2 exp end exp end 1st podomere 1:0 0:1 1:0 0:1 2d podomere 1:0 3 1:1 0:1 3d podomere 5 6 4 leg 3 leg 4 exp end exp end lst podomere 1:0 0:1 1:0 0:1 2d podomere 1:1 0:1 ei 0:1 3d podomere 6 5 6 5 Long inner seta on the second exopodite podo- mere of leg 1 absent. Leg 5 (Fig. 36) with the inner expansion of the basal podomere having five terminal setae and in some specimens a row of small setae along the outer edge. A single outer seta on the basal podo- mere. Distal podomere with five terminal setae and a minute blunt peg about midway along the outer edge. The lengths of the setae (beginning with the outermost) as follows: Distar PODOMERE 13u 54 59 116 17 11-17 45-58 56-64 102-128 INNER EXPANSION 42 94 60 39 29 86-99 53-67 29-47 23-38 Genital field (Fig. 37) with a single plumose seta, directed posteriorly, on both sides. Egg sac (Fig. 38) 386u long, reaching to slightly beyond the middle of the third abdominal seg- ment. Usually 8 eggs (5-9, based on 6 specimens) in a single layer. Flat plane of the egg sac oriented vertically to the abdomen, so that in ventral view of the entire female the egg sac appears to be a single row of eggs, only the edge of the sac being visible. Male.—Body form as in Fig. 39. Total length, based on 10 specimens, 0.789 mm (0.700-0.943 mm). Greatest width of thorax 0.120 mm (0.112— 0.125 mm). Abdomen (Fig. 40) 4-segmented, Fics. 32-38.—Antillesia cardisomae, n. gen. and sp., female: 32, Leg 1 (A); 33, leg 2 (A); 34, leg 3 (A); 35, leg 4 (A); 36, leg 5 (C); 37, genital field (B); 38, egg sac (EH). Fic. 39.—Same, male: Dorsal (F). NX WK g thd rR Se ee SDS OODARERES SS SEX RRR LVOOQRRRWIMD Thy — — rr ¥2 35 SSE y x A S=s=— a REL LES Wy SV y V J; / jj Fras. 32-39 —(For legend see opposite page.) 86 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES with transverse rows of setae. First antenna (Fig. 41) 7-jointed and slightly prehensile, the fourth podomere bearing an aesthetask 90 long, extending well beyond the tip of the antenna. Last podomere (Fig. 42) with a slender aesthe- task. Legs 1-4 like those of the female, with the same spine and setal formula, except for the en- dopodite of leg 3 (Fig. 43) which has the next to the outermost terminal seta much shorter than in the female. Leg 5 (Fig. 44) with an outer pedicellate seta 49u long on the basal podomere. Distal podomere 20 X ll» with 4 terminal setae 12, 56, 61, and 30u, respectively, beginning with the outermost. Spermatophore (Fig. 45) oval with a slender recurved neck. Remaining parts like those of the female. Oswald N. Morris has sent me specimens of A. cardisomae from Cardisoma guanhumi found on the banks of the Barnett River, near the Bogue Islands, Montego Bay, Jamaica, March MB. MSS. John B. Lewis found this copepod in C. guan- humi at St. James, Barbados, in November 1955. These specimens differ only slightly from the Jamaican ones. The small setae along the outer edge of the inner expansion of the fifth leg are lacking. Since these setae are sometimes absent in Jamaican specimens, their presence or absence can not be regarded as a distinctive specific character. The lengths of the setae on leg 5 (based on nine specimens) are as follows (beginning with the outermost): DistaL PODOMERE 14p 48 54 113 83 13-14p 46-53 49-59 90-121 67-98 INNER EXPANSION 47 82 55 30 23 36-56 74-93 32-63 27-35 19-28 The average measurements of leg 1 of 10 females are: length and width of the first podo- mere of the endopodite 95 by 16 (85-105u x 14-18), length of the inner seta 92u (86-105y), length of the second podomere 21u, and length of the exopodite 68u (64-73). I have examined specimens from Cardisoma VOL. 48, NO. 3 guanhumi sent to Dr. Dorothy E. Bliss in 1955 from the Lerner Marine Laboratory at Bimini, Bahamas. In these the small setae along the outer margin of the inner expansion of leg 5 are absent. The lengths of the setae of legs 1 and 5 are somewhat different. The average measure- ments of leg 1 of 10 females are: length and width of the first podomere of the endopodite 84 X 1dy, length of the inner seta 82u, length of the second podomere 18u, and length of the exopodite 63y. The setae of leg 5 are as follows (beginning with the outermost) : DistTaAL PODOMERE 13u 37 50 104 64 11-15 33-43 43-59 96-115 56-75 INNER EXPANSION 33 75 49 25 i17/ 27-42 61-91 39-56 19-31 14-22 In nearly all cases the extreme ranges of these setae overlap those of the Jamaican specimens. It does not seem possible, therefore, to regard the Barbados and Bahama specimens as other than representing size variations within popula- tions of the same species. Considerable individual variation exists in this species. Not uncommonly the setae may be partially retracted (Figs. 46 and 47). Occasionally (in 5 out of 30 females dissected) one or more setae on leg 5 may be absent (Fig. 48), giving the leg an asymmetrical appearance. The setae on leg 5 in the same individual may vary markedly in length. In one specimen from Bimini, for ex- ample, the three innermost setae on the imner expansion measured 45, 19, and 14u on one side and 36, 31, and 15u on the opposite side. Great care should be exercised in interpreting the signifi- cance of setal variation in both number and length unless sufficient specimens are available for study. Description based on a single specimen may not always express the usual condition. Although specimens of Gecarcinus lateralis from the same localities in the Barbados and the Bahamas were examined, no copepods were encountered, indicating a rather narrow host specificity. Other specimens of A. cardisomae were re- covered from washings of the gill chambers of C. guanhumi from Key West, Fla. (MLC.Z. no. Fias. 40-45.—A ntillesia cardisomae, n. gen. and sp., male: 40, Genital segment and abdomen, ventral (D); 41, first antenna (C); 42, last podomere of first antenna (B); 43, leg 3 (A); 44, leg 5 (B); 45, sper- matophore (C). Fics. 46-48.—Same, female: 46, Endopodite of leg 1 with partially retracted seta (A); 47, distal po- domere of leg 5 with partially retracted seta (C); 48, abnormal leg 5 (C). A5 Frias. 40-48.—(For legend see opposite page.) 46 ——_ SEA, Sy X PPP TT VOT VOL. 48, NO. 3 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 88 SAIWNH VLIVIASY88V VWIOONIYONVO, © SSWNH VL3SSISONO1 VIOONIYONVD @ SAWNNH S3dINMId VIODNIBYONVD @ NOSTIM SISNSDIVWVYEF VIOONIYONVD @ SSWNH 3JVWOSIGYVD VISATILNV Marcy 1958 5600), Swan Island (no. 8659), Guanta, Vene- zuela (no. 9054), Grand Anse, Haiti (no. 5602), and Bahia Honda, Cuba (no. 5601). The known range of this copepod extends from the Bahamas through the West Indies to the Barbados, as indicated on the accompanying map. The new harpacticoid genus Antilles1a belongs to the Ameiridae, where it seems most closely related to the genus Cancrincola Wilson 1913. It differs from the latter, however, principaily in having two terminal setae on the caudal ramus, in lacking a seta on the inner margin of the sec- ond exopodite podomere of leg 1 and in the spine and setal arrangement of legs 3 and 4, in the next to the innermost seta on the distal podomere of leg 5 in the female being the longest, in the orien- tation of the egg sac, in the slight sexual modifi- cation of the seta on the last endopodite podomere of leg 3 in the male, in the absence of a terminal hook on the male antenna, and in the structure of the fifth leg in the male. SUMMARY 1. Cancrincola jamaicensis is redescribed in part and new collection records cited, extending its known range from Bimini, Bahamas, to Can- navieiras, Brazil. 2. Cancrincola plumipes is also partly rede- HUMES: ANTILLESIA CARDISOMAE 89 scribed and new collections from Florida, South Carolina, and Rhode Island recorded. Sesarma cinereum is reported as a new host. 3. Cancrincola longiseta, originally known only from West Africa, is reported for the first time in the New World, at several localities from the Bermudas to Rio de Janeiro. 4. A new harpacticoid genus and _ species, Antillesia cardisomae, is described from the gill chambers of Cardisoma guanhumi at several localities from the Bahamas to the Barbados. LITERATURE CITED Humes, A. G. A new harpacticoid copepod from the gill chambers of a marsh crab. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 90: 379-386. 1941. . The genus Cancrincola (Copepoda, Har- pacticoida) on the west coast of Africa. Bull. Inst. Frang. Afrique Noire, ser. A, 19: 180-191. 1957. Pearse, A. 8. Parasitic Crustacea from Bimini, Bahamas. Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 101: 341-372. 1951. Ratusun, M. J. The grapsoid crabs of America. U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 97: 1-461. 1917. Witson, C. B. Crustacean parasites of West Indian fishes and land crabs, with descriptions of new genera and species. Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus. 44: 189-277. 1913. . Parasitic copepods from the Dry Tortugas. Pap. Tortugas Lab. 29: 329-347. 1935. Education does not mean teaching people what they do not know. It means teaching them to behave as they do not behave.—JOHN RUSKIN. 90 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 3 ZOOLOGY —A ppalachian Cambalidae: Taxonomy and distribution (Diplopoda: Spirostreptida). Ricoarp L. HorrMan, Blacksburg, Va. (Received September 23, 1957) Although the American cambaloid milli- peds, having been the subject of a careful treatise by H. F. Loomis in 1938, are in a more satisfactory taxonomic condition than most other groups of diplopods in this country, the examination of recently ac- quired material indicates a need for some nomenclatorial adjustments in the genus Cambala. Ideally such changes should be made in the body of a complete generic revision. Material is now being accumulated for a detailed study of Cambala, but the present scarcity of specimens of the very poorly known Ozarkian and Midwestern species will postpone its completion for an indefinite period of time. For this reason, it seems worthwhile to clear up the confusion of the large eastern species promptly, before additional synonymy accumulates in the literature. The problem is one that can be settled on the basis of geographic distribution, and the present resolution of it is due in large meas- ure to the interest and diligence of my friend Leslie Hubricht, collector of most of the existing material. The following treatment is based on 68 collections totaling well over 300 individual specimens of Cambala. Prior to 1938 only two species of Cambala had been named: annulata (Say 1821), of the Atlantic coast region, and mznor (Boll- man, 1888), of the Interior Lowlands. In his monograph of the American cambaloids, Loomis showed, however, that in fact two well-marked species—easily recognizable by several structural characters apart from the male gonopods—occurred in the southeast within the range previously ascribed only to annulata. Making what, on the basis of his limited material, was certainly a justifiable decision, Loomis restricted the name annulata to the population in which the peritremata are larger and more distinctly “pyriform” as stipulated in Say’s original description. Of this species, Loomis had material from the mountains of eastern Tennessee and western North Carolina. For the other form—the annulata of earlier workers—he proposed the new name Cambala cristula, an arrangement which has been accepted by all workers who have subsequently dealt with the group. It is now apparent, however, on the basis of much subsequent field work, that the name cristula is based upon the common and widespread member of the genus, which ranges over much of eastern United States and which is apparently the only cambaloid occurring in the Atlantic Coastal Plain. On the other hand, the species which Loomis identified as annulata seems clearly to be confined to a narrow strip of high country making up the Iron and Unaka Mountain ranges of the southern Appalachians. Inas- much as Say’s excursion to Florida in 1818, during which the types of annulata were taken, was limited to the coastal area, it seems reasonable to assume that he would have collected the cambaloid known to occur there rather than a species of re- stricted range which is endemic to a region he never visited. The qualifying adjective “oyriform” used by Say in his description could equally well be applied to either of the species, although of course the peritre- mata of the montane species are much more accentuated and ‘‘pear-shaped.”’ This identification of the name annulata on the basis of geographical evidence occa- sions a certain amount of departure from existing nomenclature. For the present, the name cristula Loomis 1938 (type locality, Etowah, Tenn.) will have to be regarded a junior synonym of annulata Say 1821, with the reservation that it will be available should the trans-Appalachian segment of the annulata population be found subspecifically distinct from the typical form of the southern Atlantic Coastal Plain. The species which Loomis treated as annulata must now be provided with a new name. For the present, with extended descrip- tions available in Loomis’s valuable paper, it does not seem necessary to go into detail regarding comparative morphology, a matter which will be covered thoroughly in the Marcu 1958 forthcoming generic revision. Only the salient diagnostic characters of the two Appalachian species are cited, and these two are readily separated from all other species by their large size as well as by details of the male genitalia. The two species under con- sideration may be distinguished from each other by numerous structural differences, of which some of the most conspicuous have been selected for the diagnostic comparison which follows. It seems appropriate that the montane Cambala be named in honor of Mr. Hubricht, who although primarily concerned with the study of terrestrial gastropods has nonethe- less secured more cambalids than have all other collectors combined, and it is largely through his efforts that the present treat- ment was possible. 1. Body very long and slender, 18 to 20 times as long as wide, and distinctly narrowed toward the anterior end; peritremata very pro- nounced, subconical in shape, and on fourth segment much larger than the dorsal crests; coxal plates of anterior gonopods distally acuminate and not concealed by the telopo- dites; coxal process of posterior gonopods long, slender, and simple, directed dis- HOO ae Cambala hubrichti,n. sp. Body distinctly stouter, 14 to 15 times as long as broad, the anterior segments not con- spicuously narrowed; peritremata lower and more rounded, those of fourth segment not larger than the dorsal crests; coxal plates of anterior gonopods distally furecate and con- cealed by the incurved telopodites; coxal process of posterior gonopods short and stout, distally with several marginal dempakioms. 5.) 4. Cambala annulata (Say) Cambala annulata (Say) Julus annulatus Say, 1821, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 2: 108. Cambala lactarius Gray, 1832, in Griffith: ‘‘The Animal Kingdom, arranged in accordance with its organization by the Baron Cuvier... etc.’’ 14: pl. 135, fig. 2; 15: 784 (misidentification of this species as Julus lactarius Say?). Spirobolus annulatus Wood, 1865, Trans. Amer. iiloss soc, mis.) 13): 212: Cambala annulata Cope, 1869, Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc. 11: 181.—Bollman, 1887, Ann. New York mead. Sei. 4: 42- 1888 Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 11: 339.—Chamberlin, 1918, Psyche 25: 24.— Brimley, 1938, Insects of North Carolina: 498.—Chamberlin, 1947, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 99: 58. Cambala cristula Loomis, 1938, Proce. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 86: 39, fig. 12; 1939, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 86: 168; 1943, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 92: 390.—Causey, 1952, Amer. Mid]. Nat. 50: 156. HOFFMAN: APPALACHIAN CAMBALIDAE Q] Type specumen.—Female, in the British Mu- seum (Natural History), presented by Thomas Say. Type locality.— ‘Southern States” (Say), prob- ably the coastal region between Charleston, S. C., and Jacksonville, Fla. Distribution —The range of this species, as known at present, is fairly extensive, extending from central Virginia south to northern’ Florida, west to Alabama, and north to the unglaciated parts of Ohio and Indiana. Most of the localities plotted on the accom- panying map are based on specimens in my collection. For records in the Coastal Plain, how- ever, we must turn to the literature. In the original description of Cambala cristula, Loomis recorded specimens from Adams Run, Charleston County, South Carolina, and these millipeds are probably representative of the local population from which Say obtained his type specimen. Sub- sequently (1943) Loomis reported the species from Florida Caverns, north of Marianna, Jack- son County, Fla., and from Kymulga Cave, 7 miles northwest of Childersburg, Talladega County, Ala., both collections being made by Leshe Hubricht. Other records of annulata from more western states, such as those of Bollman (1888) for Arkansas, and Chamberlin (1918) for Louisiana, are based upon other species of the genus, which have been subsequently described as new. Early records for Indiana by Bollman (1889) are based upon specimens of Cambala minor, but recent collections of annulata from Jefferson County, Indiana (Hubricht) and from Hocking County, Ohio (Bailey, Thomas, and Walker) establish that species north of the Ohio River in unglaciated territory. Normally annulata is somewhat secretive in habits, occurring at the deepest levels of humus deposits or in the burrows of small mammals, and this fact has doubtless been responsible for the idea that the species is scarce. In the Appa- lachian region of southwest Virginia and western North Carolina, one can usually find annulata in abundance. For instance, in the vicinity of Blacksburg, Va., it is one of the most frequently encountered diplopods, and large collections at- test to its prevalence in the western Piedmont area of North Carolina. Further to the north, however, the species becomes very scarce, for at Charlottesville Va., only two specimens could be found in nearly four years of local field work, and around Clifton Forge, in western Virginia, only 92, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES one has been collected in more than a decade of search. No material has been seen in extensive collections of millipeds made around Washington, D. C., and it seems possible that annulata does not extend farther north along the east coast than is now known. Altitudinally, annulata ranges from sea level up to around 4000 feet at Highlands, N. C., and O fo) (e) fe) fe) 0 fe) ce) ce) re) (e) 0 0 VoL. 48, No. 3 Burkes Garden, Va. There appear to be no structural variations associated from the material from high elevations. According to my field experience and Mr. Hubricht’s collection data, annulata is most fre- quently found in rather dry upland oak woods, usually deep in humus but occasionally under partly buried logs and rotting stumps in dry lo- fe) ce) (@) (e) - ° ) 0 oO re) (0) QO VN Ve 10) eee’ ra: . ce) a. ama 4 oO 8 a 4 O ie) que ce) _ Fig. 1.—Southeastern United States, showing the distribution of Cambala annulata (Say) by open circles and of Cambala hubrichti, n. sp., by solid triangles. Records are based upon specimens personally examined and literature reports considered to be reliable. Marca 1958 cations. The species is gregarious, and usually several can be found together. Curiously enough, I have never discovered one in motion, even at night when nearly all other millipeds are active. When handled, specimens exhibit a_ peculiar slowness and stiffness of motion, and tend to curl into a loose spiral. Mated pairs have been found in May and June. The observed season of activity ranges from mid-February to November at Blacksburg, Va. Cambala hubrichti, n. sp. Cambala annulata (nec Say, 1821) Loomis, 1938, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 86: 37, fig. 11.—Chamber- lin, 1952, Great Basin Nat. 12:30.—Chamberlin and Hoffman, 1958, U. S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 212 (in press). Type specimens—Male holotype, U. 8. Nat. Mus. (no. 2463), from a bluff along the Doe River, 1 mile northwest of Hampton, Carter County, Tenn., collected by Leslie Hubricht on May 3, 1951. Topo-paratypes from the same collection are deposited in the Zoologisch Mu- seum, Amsterdam, and the Senckenberg Mu- seum, Frankfurt a/M. Diagnosis —A very large species of Cambala, adults usually more than 50 mm in length, with a very strongly sculptured body about 18 to 20 times as long as its greatest diameter. From C. annulata, the only other species of equal size, this species is readily distinguished by the char- acters set forth in the preceding key couplet. In no other form of the genus are the peritremata of the 4th segment larger than the intervening dorsal crests. This form has been adequately described and illustrated in the work of Loomis cited above, under the name annulata. Detailed consideration of the male genitalia is reserved for a future treatment. Distribution —Cambala hubricht: occurs over a narrow strip of mountainous terrain in the ad- joining parts of southwest Virginia, eastern Tennessee, and western North Carolina. To the south, it has been taken as far as the Nantahala Gorge in Swain County, North Carolina; north- ward, to the Alleghenies in Wythe County, Virginia. The species is not, however, limited to high elevations, having been taken as low as 1,500 feet at several localities. Specimens have been collected in the Balsams, the Iron Mountains, the Unacoi range, Holston Mountain, satellites of the Great Smokies, and HOFFMAN: APPALACHIAN CAMBALIDAE 93 on the Blue Ridge itself northeast of Asheville. There are still no records, however, for the Black Mountains, although the species surely occurs there. All of the foregoing mountains and ranges are, physiographically, part of the South- ern Section of the Blue Ridge Province. Perhaps the most interesting locality for hubrichtt is its northernmost, on Walker Moun- tain, a long and prominent mountain on the northwest side of the Tennessee River Valley and a component of the Ridge and Valley physio- graphic province. That a milliped species basi- cally endemic to the southern Blue Ridge should occur more or less physiographically isolated at the northern extremity of its known range is of considerable zoogeographic interest. This instance reflects a distributional pattern recently estab- lished for the salamander Plethodon jordani met- calfi Brimley, as well as for species in other animal groups. The evidence from both present-day physi- ography and known animal distribution indicates a former faunistic continuity from the Appalach- ian Plateau region of central West Virginia south and eastward to the parallel but offset mountains of the Southern Blue Ridge. The main trend of the former high country was clearly south across the region now included in southwest Virginia, and even today that region remains studded with isolated high peaks and ridges along the divide between the upper Tennessee and Kanawha river drainage systems. Although the ranges of annulata and hubrichti overlap both horizontally and altitudinally at several areas, the species have not yet been taken together or in close proximity. Despite this ap- parent vicariation (which some systematists take, per se, to indicate subspecific relationship), the structural differences between these two large cambalids are so numerous as to leave no doubt that they are worthy of full specific rank. In the material examined thus far, I have seen no speci- mens which could be considered intermediate in any respect. Records upon which the present concept of the species’ range is based are listed as follows, the collections being made by me except as otherwise credited. VIRGINIA. Wythe County: Big Bend Recreation Area, 4,000 feet, Big Walker Mountain about 10 miles northwest of Wytheville, August 6, 1956. Smyth County: Brushy Mountain, 5 miles east of O4 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Marion, May 4 and August 20, 1954. Patrick County: Pinnacles of Dan, 6 miles southwest of Vesta, May 8, 1951 (W. B. Newman and R. L. Hoffman), also May 7, 1955 (W. T. Keeton, W. C. Lund, and R. L. Hoffman), also April 20, 1957 (R. E. Crabill, Jr., and R. L. Hoffman). Grayson County: Helton Creek, east side of Mount Rogers, 4 000 feet, June 19, 1950, and Peach Bottom Creek, 4 miles southwest of Independence, June 20, 1950 (J. A. Fowler and Hoffman); Comer’s Rock Recreation Area, 2 miles northwest of Comer’s Rock, June 15, 1950 (Leslie Hubricht). Washington County: Laurel Creek near Damascus, April 28, 1951 (Hubricht). TENNESSEE. Johnson County: Holston Moun- tain, 2 miles west of Shady Valley, June 20, 1950 (Fowler and Hoffman). Carter County: Doe River bluff, 1 mile northwest of Hampton, May 3, 1951 (Hubricht). Unicoi County: Unaka Springs, southeast of Erwin, September 23, 1951, also June 2, 1952. Green County: Camp Creek, June 1947 (Mike Wright). NortH Carouina. Alleghany County: Air Bellows Gap, June 20, 1955 (Arnold VanPelt). Watauga County: 6 miles north of Boone, June 17, 1948 (Wright). Avery County: Route 221, east side of Grandfather Mountain, June 1, 1954; between Newland and Elk Park, May 20, 1956 (Keeton, Lund, and Hoffman). Mitchell County: 3 miles northwest of Spruce Pine, June 4, 1954. Yancey County: Route 19, 2 miles east of the State line, June 2, 1952. Jackson County: Soco Falls, 10 miles northeast of Cherokee, May 20, 1956 (Keeton, Lund, and Hoffman). Swain County: Nantahala Gorge, 8 miles southwest of Bryson City, May 6, 1951 (Hubricht). In addition to the foregoing localities, the species has been reported by Chamberlin (1952) from Asheville, Buncombe County, N. C. The early record of Bollman (1888) for Balsam, Jack- son County, N. C., is probably based upon specimens of hubrichtt, but his specimens cannot at present be found for a verifying study. The material described by Loomis in 1938 was col- lected by O. F. Cook between Elizabethton and Roan Mountain, Tenn., probably within a few miles of the locality here selected as typical of this species. VOL. 48, NO. 3 ON THE ORDINAL POSITION OF THE CAMBALIDAE The present allocation of the family Cambalidae to the Spirostreptida is at variance with the classification used in the forthcoming ‘‘Checklist of the Millipeds of North America’”’ and requires some qualifi- cation. On the basis of recent studies of the comparative morphology in the cambaloid- spirostreptoid group of millipeds, I have found no basis for the recognition of the ecambaloids as a separate order. Numerous annectant groups (such as the Choctelli dae, Epinannolenidae, Physiostreptidae, and even Old World Cambalidae) constitute a network of intermediate conditions both in gonopod structure as well as configuration of the mouthparts. Some of this evidence is included in a report on the family Choctelli- dae, now in preparation, in which the order Spirostreptida is divided into three sub- suborders: Cambalidea, Epinannolenidea, and Spirostreptidea. REFERENCES BouuMAN, CuarLes Harvey. A preliminary list of the Myriapoda of Arkansas, with descriptions of new species. Ent. Amer. 4: 1-8. 1888. ———. Catalogue of the myriapods of Indiana. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 11: 403-410. 1889. CHAMBERLIN, Rautpu Vary. Myriopods from Okefenokee Swamp, Ga., and from Natchitoches Parish, Louisiana. Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer. 11: 369-880. 1918. ———., Further records and descriptions of Ameri- can millipeds. Great Basin Nat. 12: 13-34, figs. 1-21. 1952. Loomis, Harotp Freperick. The cambalord millipeds of the United States, including a family new to the fauna and new genera and species. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 86: 27-66, figs. 10-21. 1938. ; Say, THomas. Description of the myriapodae of the United States. Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila- delphia 2: 102-114. 1821. Marcu 1958 REED: HERPETOLOGY OF MARYLAND AND DELMARVA, 13 95 HERPETOLOGY .—Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, 13: Piedmont herpetofauna on coastal Delmarva. CuypE F. RrEep, Reed Herpe- torium, Baltimore, Md. (Communicated by Doris M. Cochran.) (Received September 13, 1957) The Delmarva Peninsula, which extends from the Pennsylvania border adjacent to Maryland and Delaware on the north, the Susquehanna River and Chesapeake Bay on the west, the Delaware River and Atlantic Ocean on the east, to Cape Charles, Va., and the mouth of the Chesapeake Bay on the south, is made up predominantly of coastal soils. In northern Cecil-and New Castle Counties the geological Fall Line passes, dividing the Piedmont from the Coastal Provinces. All land south of the Fall Line is considered as coastal in origin, being composed of sands and alluvial soils. There are no extensive solid rocks or stones in this area. In eastern United States the Fall Line extends from Georgia northward across the Carolinas and Virginia, passing through the center of Washington, D. C., Baltimore, Wilmington, Philadelphia, across central New Jersey, Long Island, and thence to Cape Cod, Mass. Up to the Potomac River and the Chesapeake Bay, most of the southern Coastal Plain is continuous, being divided here and there by either fresh-water rivers more inland or tidal and low level rivers along the Atlantic coast. The Del- marva Peninsula is definitely isolated by the Chesapeake Bay from this southern Coastal Plain. Southern Maryland is also separated from either of these areas either by the Potomac River from the south or by the Chesapeake Bay to the east. Likewise, southern New Jersey is isolated from the Delmarva Peninsula by the Atlantic Ocean and the Delaware River to the west and south and by other areas of the Atlantic Ocean from Long Island and southern New England. Most of the large rivers of the southern Coastal Plain have their beginnings in or above the Piedmont region; therefore, it would not be inconceivable to expect to find some Piedmont species of both plants and animals on the Coastal Plain adjacent to these rivers. In our area the Potomac River flows from the mountain regions west of the southern Maryland Coastal Plain. At the present time the Potomac flows into the Chesapeake Bay about midway up the western side of the bay. However, it is saline and tidal for about 70 miles, up to Washington, D.C.; above that point it is Piedmont, with fresh water, and rocky. The rivers on the western side of southern Mary- land which flow into the Potomac River have their origins in the coastal areas of this region, as Mattawoman, Nanjemoy, Wicom- ico, St. Marys, and Anacostia Rivers. In contrast to these rivers, those on the eastern side of southern Maryland have their origins in the Piedmont region and flow on to the Inner Coastal Plain, as the Little and Big Gunpowder Falls, Patapsco, and Patux- ent Rivers; there are some rivers in between these along the Chesapeake Bay which originate on the Coastal Plain and flow directly into the Chesapeake Bay, as Bush, Back, South, West, Severn, and Magothy Rivers. Two major rivers which have their origins and over 98 percent of their drainage in Piedmont areas flank the Delmarva Penin- sula; they are the Susquehanna and the Delaware. The land masses to either side of the Susquehanna River are Piedmont nearly to the mouth of the river at Havre de Grace (Harford County) and Perryville (Cecil County), both of these cities being at the very mouth of this river at the Chesa- peake Bay. The Delaware River ceases to be Piedmont north of Philadelphia and becomes quite wide and saline as it ap- proaches Wilmington. It develops into the Delaware Bay separating Delaware from New Jersey. There are several small rivers and creeks in the northern portion of the Delmarva Peninsula which have their origins on Piedmont soils. Some of them enter the Susquehanna River above the Fall Line, as 96 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Octoraro and Conowingo Creeks in Cecil County. Others flow down from Pennsyl- vania off the Piedmont on to Coastal regions in Cecil and New Castle Counties, as Little and Big Elk Creeks which form Elk River and the Northeast River; these rivers enter the Chesapeake Bay directly. The Brandywine Creek enters the Delaware River. Between Elk River and Northeast River is a peninsula known as Elk Neck, upon which many species of plants and animals known to be otherwise Piedmont in distribution abound. One would expect to find Piedmont species in this area for several reasons: (1) Rivers with Piedmont origins flow along either side of the peninsula; (2) the land mass is contiguous with the Pied- mont soils and areas to the north; (3) this is the end of the land mass, and many species migrating southward find natural barriers on all sides, mainly water; for many it is their most southern distribution on the Delmarva Peninsula. Except for these few small rivers and creeks in the northern portion of the Penin- sula, all the rest of the rivers on the Del- marva Peninsula have their origins within the land mass of the Peninsula. An interest- ing observation concerning the rivers on the Delmarva Peninsula is that there are very few rivers or creeks of any size on the eastern side, as Appoquinimink and Black- bird Creeks, Smyrna River, Leipsic River, Mispillion Creek, Cedar Creek, Broadkill Creek, and Indian River. None of these creeks or rivers are over 25 miles long, and they all originate in Delaware. On the western side there are many very long rivers, some over 50 miles long, traversing both Delaware and Maryland and emptying into the Chesapeake Bay, as Bohemia, Sassafras, Chester, Choptank, Transquak- ing, Nanticoke, Wicomico (not the Wicom- ico River of southern Maryland), and the Pocomoke Rivers. The fresh-water areas from Pocomoke City south to Cape Charles consist mainly of millponds, creeks and drainage ditches. There are very few areas with fresh water drainages of any size, and these soon become saline and marshy before reaching either the Chesapeake Bay or the Atlantic Ocean. The entire area of the Delmarva Peninsula VOL. 48, No. 3 south of the Chesapeake and Delaware Canal, which empties into the Elk River, is Coastal Plain and the land masses east of it (southern New Jersey) and west of it (Maryland, from Havre de Grace to St. Marys City, and Virginia, from the Potomac River to Norfolk) are Coastal Plain, the former being known as Outer Coastal Plain and the latter, as Inner Coastal Plain. On this Coastal Plain there are many areas which possess considerable numbers of Piedmont plants and Piedmont animals. The presence of the animals is much easier to explain than is the presence of the plants. This paper deals with those species of the herpetofauna that are predominantly Piedmont in distribution in Maryland and the Delmarva Peninsula but that are also known from the Coastal Plain of southern Maryland and the Delmarva Peninsula. Only the counties on Delmarva in which specimens are definitely known to have been collected and are available are listed below. The annotated lists of these species appear in the Contributions to the Herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, no. 6 through no. 11, published by the author; additional records may be found in other Contributions (see no. 5 for bibliography). There are 17 species of herptiles usually considered as being upland or Piedmont which are found on coastal Southern Mary- land and on Delmarva. It is interesting to note at this point that many plants also reach their southern limit in this area. These are annotated in another paper deal- ing with northern Piedmont species of plants which reach their southern limit on Delmarva, or in southern Maryland. Some of these species of plants reach as far south as Accomac County in Delmarva Virginia. There is a Piedmont forest along the Atlantic Ocean from Stockton (Worcester County), Maryland, to Atlantic (Accomac County), Virginia, about 30 miles long and about 10 miles wide. The author has collected about 150 species of Piedmont plants in this area in the last five years. This flora which centers around the town of Silva, Virginia is anno- tated in a botanical paper; the ferns of which have been published in Amer. Fern Journ. 46: 148-151. 1956. The maps accompanying this article show ; : : ; Marcu 1958 REED: HERPETOLOGY OF MARYLAND AND DELMARVA, 15 on Map 2 Ambystoma lus Diemicty maculatum viridescens Geological Fall Lint indicated above Map 4 Map 3 Hemidactyvlium rycea Eupy scutatum bislineata Map 6 Pseudotriton Desmognathus f ruber fuscus | Mav 7 Bufo terrestris americanus Clemmys 4nsculpta the county distribution in Maryland and 1. Diemactylus viridescens viridescens Rafin- Delmarva; the geological Fall Line is indi- °Sdue. New Castle (Newark, Piedmont); Cecil cated and the counties on Delmarva below (Octoraro Creek Valley, Piedmont); Talbot (Seth ; : i . Demonstration Forest); Northampton (Cape it are mentioned where Piedmont species of — @harles). Map 1. herptiles have been collected. 2. Ambystmoa maculata (Shaw). New Castle VOL. 48, NO. 3 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 98 Tepremps Bot 7eATAs 3n4e90und BT [eULaA BUBY studopera BATEOSUudO re ageeae’ Cay AE oT dew uN TNSueTz.t4 CICETOR | Neale ur BnTN pos snusowe ST 47 edoudwey SF 4T edouduey sTyudoudue) +t Cew CT ae J -ndewo yZatooo BTEATato LG Bp) 30) +2) 4Z Aue ydes XTIYEN OCT IsT BA eoavt ey OT Ge 6 dey Marcu 1958 (Wilmington); Cecil (along Susquehanna River from Conowingo to Port Deposit and Elk Neck); Queen Annes (Stine, 1953); Talbot (Stine, 1953). Map 2. 3. Hurycea bislineata bislineata (Green). New Castle (Hollyoak near Wilmington); Cecil (Conowingo to Port Deposit); Queen Annes (Centerville); Kent, Md. (near Sassafras River) ; Kent, Del. (Brown’s Branch); Northampton (Eastville). Map 3. 4. Hemidactylium scutatum (Schlegel). New Castle (Newark, Piedmont); Cecil (Conowingo to Port Deposit); Sussex (Millsboro); Wicomico (Quantico). Map 4. 5. Desmognathus fuscus fuscus (Rafinesque). New Castle (Shellpot Run near Wilmington; Bradywine Creek); Kent, Del. (Brown’s Branch) ; Cecil (Conowingo to Port Deposit; Bainbridge; Pusey Creek; Dove Run); Queen Annes (Center- ville); Wicomico (Conant, 1945). Map 5. 6. Pseudotriton ruber ruber (Sonnini). Cecil (Elk Neck; Big Bohemia Creek); New Castle (Wilmington; Newark). Map 6. 7. Bufo terrestris americanus Holbrook. New Castle (Conant, 1945); Cecil (Elk Neck: along Susquehanna near Octoraro Creek); Kent, Md. (Massey); Wicomico (Conant, 1945); Worcester (Conant, 1945); Accomac (Conant, 1945); Northampton (Hog Island). Map 7. ~ 8. Clemmys insculpta (LeConte). Cecil (along Susquehanna below Conowingo); Talbot (Has- ton). Map 8. 9. Natriz septemvittata (Say). New Castle (Newark and Wilmington); Cecil (Elk Neck; Camp Horseshoe; Octoraro Creek; Rodney Scout Camps); Kent, Md. (Chestertown). Map 9. 10. Storeria o. occtpitomaculata (Storer). Cecil (Elk Neck; Rodney Scout Camps); Queen Annes (Centerville); Dorchester (Blackwater Refuge) ; Worcester (Pocomoke State Forest; Old Furnace near Snow Hill). Map 10. 11. Haldea v. valeriae (Baird and Girard). Cecil (Elk Neck; Rodney Scout Camps; Rising Sun); Kent, Md. (type locality); Wicomico (Quantico); Worcester (Stockton; Old Furnace near Snow Hill; Corbin); Accomac (Silva); Northampton (Hog Island; Cobbs Island). Map ike REED: HERPETOLOGY OF MARYLAND AND DELMARVA, 13 99 12. Carphophis a. amoenus (Say). Cecil (Elk Neck; Rodney Scout Camps); Queen Annes (Carmichael; Centerville; Ruthsburg); Kent, Md. (Conant, 1945); Sussex (Conant, 1945); Wicomico (Conant, 1945); Worcester (Berlin; Pocomoke State Forest); Accomac (Wattsville). Map 12. 13. Lampropeltis g. getulus (Linnaeus). Cecil (Port Deposit; Northeast; Elk Neck; Rodney Scout Camps); Kent, Md. (Kennedyville); Queen Annes (Centreville; Crumpton; Queens- town; Ruthsburg); Talbot (Easton); Sussex (Ocean View); Dorchester (Blackwater Refuge; Gum Swamp; Cambridge); Wicomico (Powell- ville; Quantico; Salisbury; Willards); Worcester (Bishopville; Berlin; Pocomoke River near Snow Hill); Somerset (Westover; Waterloo Farm on Monie Creek); Accomae (Conant, 1945); North- ampton (Cape Charles). May 13. 14. Lampropeltis doliata triangulum (Lacé- pede). New Castle (north of Fall Line, Conant, 1945); Cecil (Camp Horseshoe; Conowingo; Rising Sun; Stony Run; Elk Neck). Map 14. 15. Opheodrys vernalis vernalis (Harlan). Cecil (Conowingo). Map 15. 16. Diadophis punctatus edwards: (Merrem). New Castle (Wilmington); Cecil (Elk Neck; Gray’s Hill; Elkton; Rodney Scout Camps). Map 16. 17. Rana sylvatica sylvatica LeConte. New Castle (Townsend); Cecil (Susquehanna River from Conowingo to Port Deposit); Kent, Del. (Brown’s Branch); Kent, Md. (Mansueti, 1940); Queen Annes (Mansueti, 1940); Dorchester (Mansueti, 1940); Wicomico (Powellville; Quan- tico); Worcester (Pocomoke State Forest; Snow Hill). Map 17. LITERATURE CITED Conant, Roger. An annotated checklist of the amphibians and reptiles of the Del-Mar-Va Peninsula. Publ. Soe. Nat. Hist. Delaware: 1-8. 1945. MansuEt!, Romeo. The wood frog in Maryland, Rana s. sylvatica (LeConte). Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc. Maryland. 10(10): 88-96, 1 col. plate, 22 figs. 1940. STINE, CHaRLes. Salamanders of the genus Am- bystoma. Maryland Nat. 28(1-2): 75-78, 4 maps. 1953. 100 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 3 ICHTHYOLOGY —Two new species of Anampses from the Hawauan Islands, with notes on other labrid fishes of this genus.1 JoHN E. RANDALL, University of Miami. (Communicated by Leonard P. Schultz.) (Received December 4, 1957) More species of the family Labridae (wrasses) are known from the Hawauan Islands than any other family of reef fishes. This preponderance is furthered in the pres- ent paper by the description of two more, both species of Anampses Quoy and Gai- mard. A key to the four Hawaiian species of this genus and discussion of related forms from other regions of the tropical Indo- Pacific are also presented. I wish to express my gratitude to Dr. William A. Gosline, of the University of Hawaii, for kindly providing the single paratypes of the two new species, with the prior knowledge that they probably repre- sent undescribed forms, and to Dr. James E. Bohlke, of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, and Robert H. Kanazawa, of the United States National Museum, for pertinent information. The holotypes of the two new species are in the United States National Museum (U.'S.N.M.). The genus Anampses is characterized as follows: Mouth small; lips moderately fleshy; a single pair of large, protruding, incisiform teeth anteriorly in the upper Jaw and a similar, more medial pair in the lower jaw (the upper incisors are slightly longer and broader and the edges sharper than the lower incisors; the uppers project outward at an angle of about 45°, the lowers directly forward or slightly downward); remaining teeth minute, generally imperceptible; body compressed, moderately deep (the depth contained about 2.5 to 4.0 times in standard length); head scaleless; body with moder- ately large scales (subgenus Pseudanampses? excepted) except for region of nape and thorax where the scales are small; 27 to 29 1 Contribution no. 195 from the Marine Lab- oratory, University of Miami. 2 Jordan and Snyder (1902: 628) proposed Ampheces as a subgenus for the species Anampses geographicus Cuvier and Valenciennes; Pseudan- ampses Bleeker (1862: 101), however, has priority. scales in lateral line (49 to 51 in Anampses (Pseudanampses) geographicus); lateral line continuous, angling down sharply at the level of about the ninth dorsal soft ray; gill membranes attached to isthmus; pre- opercle entire; dorsal fin rays IX, 12 (rarely 11 or 13); anal fin rays IIL, 12 G@anelyaiT or: 13); pectoral fin rays 13 (the uppermost a bony splint); caudal fin truncate, slightly emarginate, or slightly rounded; colorful Indo-Pacific species of moderate size (some attaining 300 mm. in standard length). KEY TO THE HAWAIIAN SPECIES OF ANAMPSES la. Body relatively deep, depth contained about 2.5 to 2.8 times in standard length; caudal fin truncate... 0.0.2) sot.22 er 2 1b. Body not deep, depth contained about 3.3 to 4 times in standard length; caudal fin slightly rounded in adults. =. 05. 255 3 2a. Each seale of body with a prominent round Witte sSpOb when Anampses cuviert (Fig. 1) 2b. Each seale of body with a narrow vertical blue lines se. Anampses godeffroyi (Fig. 2) 3a. Body without white spots; head pale (bright orange in life with blue bands) and contrasting sharply with darker body; caudal fin not paler than body. Anampses chrysocephalus, n. sp. (Fig. 3) 3b. Body with white spots (one per scale below lateral line, several per scale above); head not paler than body; caudal fin markedly paler than body (in life red distally and white basally). Anampses rubrocaudatus, n. sp. (Fig. 4) Anampses chrysocephalus, n. sp. igs Holotype —U.S.N.M. no 164465, a male, 151.5 mm in standard length and 181.5 mm in total length, obtained by J. Randall on June 19, 1953, from a fisherman whose traps were set in about 30 to 90 feet of water from Kewalo Basin to Koko Head, Oahu, Territory of Hawaii. Paratype-—University of Hawaii no. 2152, a male specimen, 139.5 mm in standard length and 168.5 mm in total length, obtained by W. Gosline in January 1950 from the Honolulu Aquarium. Marcu 1958 RANDALL: TWO NEW The majority of the aquarium fishes are pur- chased from trap fishermen. The specimen is in poor condition. It was preserved after being discovered dead on the bottom; sufficient time had elapsed for partial decomposition to occur. Description —Based on the holotype and one paratype. Counts and measurements are recorded for the holotype, followed in parentheses by data for the paratype if different from that of the holotype. Measurements were not made of the fins of the paratype. Dorsal fin rays [X,12; anal fin rays III,12] pectoral fin rays 13 (the uppermost rudimentary, the next unbranched); pelvic fin rays I,5; princi- pal caudal rays 14. Lateral line scales 28, 19 in the anterior part, 2 in the part which is bent sharply downward at the level of the ninth dorsal soft ray, and 7 in the peduncular part; a single row of large scales between anterior part of lateral line and dorsal fin and 7 rows between anterior part of lateral line and anal fin (a few small scales occur between the uppermost and lowermost rows of body scales and the dorsal and anal fins, respectively; however no scales are present basally on these fins); a patch of small scales basally on caudal fin posterior to large body scales; head naked; small scales on nape poorly developed or imbedded; triangular area from isthmus to upper base of pectoral fin and origin of pelvic fins covered with small distinct scales; gill rakers on first gill arch 13 (paratype only). Head length 2.96 (2.90); depth of body 3.36 (3.34); snout to anus 1.83 (1.81); snout to origin of pelvic fins 2.64 (2.58); snout to origin of dorsal fin 3.21 (3.03); length of dorsal fin base 1.56 (1.55); length of anal fin base 2.53 (2.54)—all in standard length. Width of body at gill opening 2.43 (2.64); least depth of caudal peduncle 2.59 (2.69); snout length 2.80 (2.75); diameter of eye 7.10 (6.89); width of interorbital 3.93 (4.00); length of pectoral fin 2.22 (fins frayed on either side, thus probably shorter than normal); length of pelvic fin 1.82; width of mouth (rictus to rictus) 5.68 (5.44); mid-center of upper lip to most posterior part of upper lip 6.01 (6.02); edge of eye to upper end of free margin of preopercle 7.35 (7.39); first dorsal spine 7.63; second dorsal spine 5.38; ninth dorsal spine 3.29; first dorsal soft ray 2.79; first anal spine 12.2; second anal spine 6.96; third anal spine 5.16; first anal soft ray 3.06— all in head length. SPECIES OF ANAMPSES 101 Profile of head with a shght indentation just anterior to a vertical through forward edge of eye; lips moderately fleshy; dentition charac- teristic of the genus, the length of the upper pair of incisors 2.2 in eye diameter, that of the lower pair 3.2 in eye diameter; upper teeth nearly touching at their base; space between lower pair of teeth contained about 3 times in eye diameter (no other teeth could be found in the jaws—only a bony plate which is exposed when the lips are pulled outward); a well-developed opercular flap, its length posterior to opercle equal to eye diameter; gill membranes attached to isthmus with a small free fold across it dorsal and anal spines slender but pungent; posterodistal ends of dorsal and anal fins pointed; caudal fin slightly rounded. Color in alcohol: head light tan, almost white with irregular, dark-edged, light bluish-gray bands and spots; a large black spot on membra- nous opercular flap; body brown, the center of each scale darker than the edges; an elongate, lobed, dark-edged, bluish-gray spot on nape extending across demarcation of pale head and brown body, the part on the body partially surrounded by a narrow pale region (this region continuous with a middorsal pale band about an eye diameter in width which extends anteriorly from origin of dorsal fin); dorsal fin dark brown with a distinct but narrow white margin; anal fin brown, shading outwardly to light yellowish brown, with a narrow pale margin, a thin sub- marginal dark line, and pale blue blotches (there is a large elongate blotch basally on each inter- radial membrane and a lesser spot or spots distal to the large one); caudal fin dark brown; pelvic fin rays brown, the membranes pale; pectoral fin pale, brown at extreme base; a pale spot on upper part of axil of pectoral fin. In life the head was brilliant orange with black- edged, iridescent blue bands and spots; body dark orangish brown with a vertically elongate erayish green spot on posterior border of each scale; lobed blue spot on nape surrounded by a narrow bright lemon yellow area which is con- tinuous with a yellow middorsal band on nape; lips and adjacent portion of snout light tan; dorsal and caudal fins dark brown, the dorsal with a narrow white margin; anal fin brown, shading in outer part to yellow, with blue blotches, a narrow white margin, and a thin dark brown submarginal line; pectoral fin hyaline, dark brown at base; axil of pectoral blue dorsally 102 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 3: Fie. 1.—Anampses cuviert Quoy and Gaimard: From a 35-mm color transparency of a fresh specimen. Standard length, 210 mm. | Fic. 2.—Anampses godeffroyi Giinther: From a 35-mm color transparency of a fresh specimen. Dorsal fin split. Standard length, 268 mm. Fig. 3.—Anampses chrysocephalus, n. sp.: From a 35-mm color transparency of the holotype when fresh. Standard length, 151.5 mm. Marcu 1958 RANDALL: TWO NEW SPECIES OF ANAMPSES Fic. 4.—Anampses rubrocaudatus, n. sp.: From a photograph of the holotype after preservation by W. Courtenay. Pectorals abraded and injury evident on back at rear base of dorsal. Standard length, 137.7 mm. orange in midsection, shading to pale lavender ventrally. Vernon E. Brock, director of the Division of Fish and Game of the Territory of Hawai, has informed me that he has observed Anampses chrysocephalus to be moderately common at depths of about 100 feet on the Waianae coast, Oahu. Named chrysocephalus (Greek xpvaos, gold; kedadn, head) in reference to the striking colora- tion of the head. Of the species of Anampses, A. chrysocephalus appears to be most closely related to A. melanu- rus Bleeker, also an elongate species with a black spot on the opercular membrane. A. chryso- cephalus is distinct from melanurus in its smaller eye, shorter third anal spine relative to longest dorsal spine, and color. Instead of a pale head with darker irregular spots, melanurus has a dark head with light spots; also melanurus has a spotted dorsal fin and a hght caudal fin with a broad dark subterminal vertical band (after de Beaufort, 1940: 103, no specimens seen by me). Anampses rubrocaudatus, n. sp. Fig. 4 Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 160624, a female, 137.7 mm in standard length and 166 mm in total length, obtained from §. Tinker of the Honolulu Aquarium, Oahu, Territory of Hawaii, 1950. Paratype-—University of Hawai no. 2291, $2.6 mm in standard length and 108.5 mm in total length, collected the Division of Fish and Game, Territory of Hawai, by spearing off Waianae, Oahu, at a depth of about 90 feet, in 1956. by personnel of Description.—Based on the holotype and one paratype. Counts and measurements are recorded for the holotype, followed in parentheses by data for the paratype if different from that of the holotype. Dorsal cm ways IDC Ae aime inn ina IMU 4 pectoral fin rays 13 (outer portion of fins absent in holotype); pelvic fin rays 1,5; principal caudal rays 14. Lateral line scales 28, 19 in anterior portion, 2 in part which angles downward at level of base of ninth dorsal soft ray, and 7 in pedun- cular part; a single row of large scales above lateral line (above this a second row about one- half as large, and between the latter row and the dorsal fin a few small scales, these more numerous anteriorly); 8 rows of large scales below lateral line to origin of anal fin (plus a few small scales next to fin); 7 large scale rows between lateral line and more posterior part of anal fin; small scales present on base of caudal fin, thorax, and ventral part of abdomen; no median predorsal scales, but a few small imbedded scales more laterally on nape; head naked; gill rakers on first arch 20 (holotype only). Head length 2.86 (2.98); depth of body 3.29 (3.95); snout to anus 1.86 (paratype not meas- ured); snout to origin of pelvic fins 2.73 (para- type not measured); snout to origin of dorsal fin 2.98 (paratype not measured); length of dorsal fin base 1.58 (1.62); length of anal fin base 2.60 (2.95)—all in standard length. Width of body at gill opening 2 least depth of caudal peduncle 2.69 (38.11); snout length 3.12 (8.34); diameter of eve 7.17 (5.32); width of interorbital 3.93 (4.62); length length of 77 ? 46 (2.7% is of pectoral fin 1.80 (paratype only); pelvie fin 1.77 (2.18); width of mouth (rictus to 104 rictus) 5.11 (6.93); mid-center of upper lip to most posterior part of upper lip 5.16 (5.04); edge of eye to upper end of free margin of pre- opercle 7.17 (paratype not measured); first dorsal spine 8.00 (7.78); second dorsal spine 5.51 (paratype not measured); ninth dorsal spine 3.20 (3.30); first dorsal soft ray 2.40 (2.91); first anal spine 9.60 (10.6); second anal spine 6.00 (8.70); third anal spine 4.70 (4.95); first anal soft ray 2.74 (2.98)—all in head length. Profile of head smooth; lips fleshy, the edges rounded and firm; no membranous flap extend- ing from ethmoidal part of snout over groove posterior to upper lip to rest on base of upper lip; dentition characteristic of genus, the length of the incisors of the holotype 2.6 mm; upper incisors of holotype separated by 1.7 mm and lowers by 0.7 mm; a well-developed opercular flap, its length posterior to opercle equal to eye diameter; gill membranes attached to isthmus with a small free fold across it; dorsal and anal spines flexible in holotype, pungent in paratype; posterodistal ends of dorsal and anal fins pointed; caudal fin slightly rounded. Color in alcohol: dark brown (the head of the paratype a little darker than the body) with a white spot in center of each scale below the lateral line; scales in lateral line and above lateral line with about 4 to 6 white spots; head with numerous small white spots, those on snout, interorbital, and nape very small and close-set; unscaled portion of caudal fin white; dorsal fin brown with numerous small white spots and a white border; anal fin dark brown with a few scattered faint white dots, especially at base, and a very narrow white margin; pectoral fins white, the base brown with white spots; pelvic fins with a broad brown lateral edge, light brown rays, and hyaline membranes; lips whitish, the base of the upper lip light brown with small white spots. Life color of the holotype of A. rubrocaudatus from a 35-mm color transparency on file in the United States National Museum: Dark chocolate brown with white spots; outer half of caudal fin bright red, basal half white; pectoral pink; lips pinkish; inner portion of iris orange-yellow. Like A. chrysocephalus, this species appears to be restricted to moderate depths on Hawaiian reefs. Named rubrocaudatus (Latin rubro, combining form of ruber, red; caudatus, tailed) in reference to the prominent red color on the outer half of the caudal fin. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES This species is most closely allied to Anampses meleagrides Cuvier and Valenciennes, known from East Africa to the East Indies, Philippines, Riu Kiu Islands, and possibly Japan (the species Anampses ikedae and A. nagoyoi described by Tanaka from Kagoshima, Japan, may be syno- nyms of A. meleagrides). The similarity is so great that it seems probable that meleagrides gave rise through isolation in Hawaii to rubro- caudatus. A. rubrocaudatus differs from melea- grides in having a larger mouth (the width of the mouth of the 137.7 mm holotype measures 9.3 mm; of a 136-mm Philippine specimen of meleagrides 6 mm; the length of the upper jaw of rubrocaudatus is 10.7 mm, of the meleagrides specimen, 8.7 mm); lips which are more fleshy and firm (the edges of the lips of meleagrides are thin and supple); lacking a frenum extending from the ethmoidal part of the snout over the groove posterior to the upper lip and over- lapping the basal part of the upper lip (this flap in meleagrides makes the lips seem even smaller than they actually are), having a slightly rounded instead of slightly emarginate caudal fin, and color as follows: several white spots per scale in lateral line and above (single spot per scale in meleagrides); spots on head and on dorsal fin smaller and more numerous; spots on anal fin tiny and indistinct; lips pale (brownish in meleagrides); no white line at base of pectoral fins as in meleagrides; caudal fin red and white in life (yellow in life in meleagrides). A. meleagrides may have a white-edged black spot posteriorly on the dorsal and anal fins. Insufficient specimens have been examined to determine if this is a juvenile or sexual character. It appears to be a juvenile character in Anampses cuviert Quoy and Gaimard from the Hawaiian Islands. A specimen 46 mm in standard length has a prominent ocellated black spot on the hind part of the dorsal and anal fins; on a 70- mm specimen the anal ocellus is gone and the dorsal ocellus just disappearing. As indicated in the key, the four Hawaiian species of Anampses are easily distinguished one from another, although color characters, of necessity, have been emphasized. Both A. cuviert and A. godeffroyr Giinther* are portrayed in color in Giinther’s Fische der Stidsee 3 As was suspected by Jordan and Evermann (1905: 294) and Jordan and Seale (1906: 296), Anampses evermanni Jenkins is a synonym of A. godeffroyt. VOL. 48, No. 3 | Marcy 1958 (1881: pls. 136 A and 140, respectively), although somewhat inaccurately. The spots on the body of A. cuviert should be white instead of blue. A. godeffroyz is depicted as pale blue with a vertical blue line on each scale and numerous irregular dark blue markings on the head. The true life color (as based on a specimen 268 mm in standard length from Hawaii) is as follows: Body grayish brown with vertical blue lines on scales; antero- dorsal quadrant of head (enclosing eye) bright green; remainder of head grayish brown with tortuous, narrow, dark blue lines, those on nape small and not interconnected; dorsal and anal fins brownish gray with prominent bright blue margins and narrow lengthwise dark blue lines: caudal fin colored like body on basal half, orange- yellow on outer half, with short horizontal blue lines and broad blue upper and lower margins; pectoral fin grayish brown on basal half and orange-yellow on outer half, with a blue line on upper margin; iris red and the lips flesh-colored. Previously A. godeffroyi was known only from the Hawatian Islands, except for one uncertain record from the Society Islands by Fowler (1928: 332) based on two specimens in the Museum of Comparative Zoology. Of these Fowler wrote, “Though dark and vertical lines little distinct these specimens evidently this species, not previously known from outside Hawaii.” I have recently collected this species from the Society Islands and Tuamotu Archipelago and can thus verify Fowler’s record. Specimens are catalogued at the United States National Museum under the number 164602 and at the Natural History Museum, Stanford University, under the number 48870. In French Oceania this wrasse was observed only in relatively shallow (generally less than 20 feet) outer reef areas exposed to the action of surf. On several occasions while I was attempting to spear individuals of this species, they retreated to the inshore ends of surge channels and disappeared in the white water of the surf. In Hawaii the species is usually seen in deeper, less turbulent water. A. godeffroyt has a vertical blue line on each scale of the body in the Society Islands as in Hawaii; however, there are some differences in color between the species in the two island groups. The life colors of a 200 mm specimen from Tahiti are as follows: Body iridescent greenish brown, the edges of the scales dark olive, with a vertical bright blue narrow line on each scale RANDALL: TWO NEW SPECIES OF ANAMPSES 105 except on the nape, thorax, abdomen, and scaled portion of caudal fin, where blue spots replace the blue lines (ground color on abdomen purplish and on thorax pale turquoise); head dull olive- green, purplish on opercle, shading to pale tur- quoise ventrally with widely spaced narrow bright blue lines, two of which are nearly hori- zontal and run from snout through eye almost to end of opercle; dorsal fin greenish yellow basally, shading to copper up to the blue margin (which occupies about one-tenth the width of the fin), with about three irregular rows of small blue spots; anal similar to dorsal, but with a broader blue margin (about one-fourth width of fin); caudal fin with broad bright blue upper and lower margins and eight blue horizontal bars interspersed with orangish areas; upper edge of pectoral fin blue, then a region of hyaline copper shading to pale yellow on lower part of fin; pelvic fins blue-edged with a median blue band separating lateral copper and medial pale yellow areas; iris yellow with shades of iridescent green. A color marking readily seen underwater on the species but not noticeable when the fish are removed from the water is a light greenish area dorsally on caudal peduncle. The most notable differences of the Society Is- lands specimens from the Hawaiian are the discrete instead of interconnected blue lines on the head, the lack of the anterodorsal green area on the head, and rows of small spots on the dorsal and anal fins instead of solid blue lines. In view of the similarity of the two forms, the differences mentioned are believed to be subspecific and not specific in magnitude. As might be expected from the isolation of the Hawaiian Islands, due not only to distance but also to the direction of ocean currents, minor color differences are frequently seen between a species of reef fish in Hawaii and elsewhere in the Indo-Pacific area. In the color differences are not so minor and may be coupled with differences in counts or propor- tional measurements. A point is reached where a taxonomist feels impelled to recognize the Hawaiian form as a distinct species. Unfor- tunately, opinions vary as to the degree of differ- some species entiation necessary to establish a species in Hawaii as distinct. This problem, of course, is not confined to Hawaii and the tropical Pacific, but I shall restrict the present discussion to this area. Some authors, to give but a few examples, regard Chromis dimidiatus (Klunzinger), Macero- 106 pharyngodon geoffroy (Quoy and Gaimard), and Acanthurus triostegus (Linnaeus) in Hawaii as not specifically different from these species elsewhere in their range, whereas others recognize them as full species by the names C. leucurus Gilbert, M. meleagris (Cuvier and Valenciennes), and A. sandvicensis Streets (for details of these species pairs, see Randall, 1955 and 1956). Some authors have preferred to regard a Hawai- ian form as a full species when a character, even if only a small spot of color, provides complete separation of the Hawaiian material from that elsewhere in Oceania. Since no insular stepping stones join the Hawaiian chain with islands to the south and west, it is not possible to demon- strate typical subspecific integradation at some intermediate place, but this does not mean that the subspecific concept cannot be applied. I do not agree with Gosline (1955: 469) who wrote, “Tt was felt that intergradation between the Hawaiian endemics and their Central Pacific counterparts would oceur at Johnston if any- where. If does not occur there (or elsewhere among any of the fishes here investigated, and on the basis of absence of intergradation (the term is here used in contrast with introgression) the Hawaiian endemics must be considered full species.” As this author has indicated (p. 479), the Johnston Island fish fauna is essentially Hawaiian (as its proximity to Hawaii would suggest); therefore I do not believe the absence of intergradation at Johnston is a strong indication of full specific rank of the Hawaiian forms in question. There does not seem to be equal opportunity for the Central Pacific counterparts to meet the Hawaiian forms at Johnston. In my opinion the best criterion on which to base the assigning of a name to a Hawaiian variant con- sists of drawing inferences from the degree of differentiation of other closely related species in the same genus (if they exist) which occur together. Naturally this is imperfect, for a Hawaiian form, although distinguished mor- phologically only slightly, or perhaps not at all, from the species in non-Hawaiian areas, may have differentiated physiologically or ecologically such that natural interbreeding would be impossible. As long as the morphological differences be- tween Hawaiian and related non-Hawaiian forms are noted, it might be argued that it is unimpor- tant whether opinions differ as to how to recognize them nomenclatorially. In a sense this is true; however I believe the conservative approach (namely, the recognition of the Hawaiian forms as JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 3 subspecies or varieties when differences are slight, even though constant) is preferred, for it results in fewer specific names with which to contend and is less misleading from a zoogeographical standpoint. Anampses cuvieri is known only from the Hawaiian Islands where, like many of the endemic fishes, it is abundant. The common Anampses caeruleopunctatus Riippell is im continuous distribution from the Red Sea and east Africa eastward throughout all Oceania except Hawaii.* These two species are very closely related. Their similarity first became apparent to the writer when the life colors of caeruleopunctatus were noted in collections from the Society Islands, Tuamotus, and Marquesas (the species is pre- viously unrecorded from the latter two island groups; specimens have been deposited in the United States National Museum, and Natural History Museum at Stanford University). A 180-mm specimen from Tahiti was olive, shading to reddish ventrally, the edges of the scales darker, with a single bright blue spot, edged in blackish, in the center of each scale; head marked with similar spots and dark-edged blue bands (more bands and fewer spots on large specimens) ; dorsal fin dark copper with narrow bright blue margin, dark submarginal line, and approx1- mately three rows of small dark-edged blue spots; anal fin bright red with a margin like the dorsal and two rows of small dark-edged blue spots, one at the base and one half way out in fin; caudal fin dark reddish brown with blue edges and blue spots as on body but slightly larger; pectoral fins hyaline with pale yellow rays; pelvic fins red with blue lateral edge and two blue blotches; lips reddish. A. caeruleo- punctatus differs from A. cuviert in having blue instead of white spots, in lacking small inter- mediate spots between some of the larger ones centered in each body scale (this giving more of a linear effect on cuviert), in having principally blue bands on the head instead of small spots, in having a spotted caudal fin and rows of spots instead of solid lines in the dorsal and anal fins; the dorsal and anal fins are pointed poste- riorly in caeruleopunctatus and slightly rounded in cuviert; caeruleopunctatus (Society Islands and Tuamotus) has 21 or 22 gill rakers on the first 4The two specimens of A. caeruleopunctatus (U.S.N.M. no. 71657) listed from Japan by Fowler and Bean (1928: 230) were collected in Okinawa, Riu Kiu Islands. Kamohara (1954: 46, fig. 11) has recorded the species from Japan. Marcu 1958 gill arch and cuvrert 19 or 20. The above differ- ences are probably great enough to warrant the recognition of two species, but the similarity in other characters and the distribution of the species suggests that caeruleopunctatus may have been the progenitor stock which gave rise through independent evolution of a Hawaiian population to A. cuviert. Although Fowler (1928: 333) correctly placed Anampses pulcher Regan from Easter Island in the synonymy of caeruleopunctatus, he created another synonym when he described Anampses tinkhami from the Riu Kiu Islands (1946: 162). Dr. James E. Bohlke provided the author with information on the type of A. tinkhami in the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Another species of Anampses, A. twistii Bleeker, with a type locality of Ambon, East Indies, was collected in the Society Islands and was sighted in the pass at the atoll of Takaroa in the Tuamotu Archipelago. Previously this species was known from the central Pacific from one 80-mm specimen taken at Fiji (as Anampses fidjensis Sauvage, 1880: 224). Dr. Leonard P. Schultz, of the United States National Museum, will record the species from the northern Marshall Islands in volume 2 of Fishes of the Marshall and Maranas Islands. Recently Kamohara (op. cit.) has recorded it from Japan and Smith (1955: 931) from the western Indian Ocean. The Society Islands specimen was taken with a spear in the lagoon of Moorea at a depth of 40 feet. It measures 83 mm in _ standard length, and is catalogued in the United States National Museum under number 114743. In life the fish was purple on most of the body and upper half of the head; the lower half of the head and the thorax up to the pectoral base was yellow (the demarcation between purple and yellow being gradual, not abrupt); body and nape covered with small, black-edged blue spots (few, however, occurring on thoracic region); caudal peduncle and caudal fin dull orange-red with a broad whitish posterior margin and small pale blue spots (spots lacking on outer third of fin); dorsal and anal fins reddish purple, shading to copper distally and posteriorly (the anal with shades of yellow anteriorly in middle of fin), with small dark-edged blue spots and a conspic- uous blue-edged black spot, in diameter nearly twice as great as eye, in the posterior part of each fin; dorsal and anal fins margined narrowly with blue anteriorly and black posteriorly; paired fins yellow, the pectorals with a dark brown band RANDALL: TWO NEW SPECIES OF ANAMPSES 107 at the base; opercular membrane darker than rest of head; lips orangish white. The body depth of the specimen is contained 3.3 times in the standard length; the upper pair of canine teeth are sharply upcurved and the lowers sharply downcurved. Individuals of the species nearly twice as large as this specimen were seen in the Same area, aS were Juveniles. The blue spots on the latter were fewer and larger, and the bright yellow ventral coloration was lacking. Specimens of the non-Hawaiian species, Anampses diadematus Riippell, A. amboinensis Bleeker, A. geographicus Cuvier and Valen- ciennes, and A. pterophthalmus Bleeker were examined at the United States National Museum and the Natural History Museum, Stanford University. A. diadematus is suggestive of godef- froyi in having vertical pale lines on the scales and similar body proportions. It differs primarily in having predorsal scales (absent mid-dorsally on godeffroyt) and in possessing a distinctive pale band running forward from the eye across the front part of the interorbital space and a second, narrower band connecting eyes vertically across the interorbital. A. pterophthalmus and A. geographicus differ from all other Anampses in having much higher scale counts (lateral line scales given by de Beaufort, op. cit. as 49-51). These two species differ from one another only in color and caudal fin shape, and it is believed that the former is the female and subadult male of the latter, although more specimens are needed to demon- strate this conclusively. A. geographicus is the older name. Mostly females and a few males were found among the museum specimens of ptero- phthalmus which could be sexed. The largest specimen is 166.5 mm in standard length. Seven males and no females were identified among 16 specimens of geographicus which could be sexed. With the exception of one disconcerting 107-mm_ specimen (sex indeterminable) the geographicus ranged from 150 to 199 mm in standard length. A. pterophthalmus has a truncate caudal fin and a large, black, white-edged spot posteriorly in the dorsal and anal fins. Except for the 107-mm specimen which has a truneate caudal fin, all of the geographicus have emarginate caudal fins with slightly produced lobes. A. geographicus is a more colorful species, has a vermiculation of narrow bands on the head and chest, and ordinarily lacks ocelli in the fins. Fowler and Bean (op. cit.: 227) recorded one specimen from Cebu, Philippine Islands, with 108 cpscure ocelli on the last dorsal and anal rays. The specimen is 152 mm in standard length, and its caudal fin is slightly emarginate. This fish appears to be transforming from the pterophthal- mus form to that of geographicus. LITERATURE CITED Beaurort, L. F. pe. The fishes of the Indo-Aus- tralian Archipelago. 8: xv + 508, 56 figs. Leiden, 1940. Bueeker, P. Atlas ichthyologique .. . néerlandais 1: xxi + 168, 48 pls. Amsterdam, 1862. Fowier, H.W. The fishes of Oceania. Bernice P. Bishop Mus. Mem. 10: ii + 540, 49 pls., 82 text figs. 1928. A collection of fishes obtained in the Riu Kiu Islands by Captain Ernest R. Tinkham A.U.S. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 98: 123-218, 76 figs. 1946. —— and Bran, B. A. Contributions to the biology of the Philippine Archipelago and adjacent regions. U. S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 100(7): vil + 525, 49 pls. 1928. Gostrne, W. A. The inshore fish fauna of Johns- ton Island, a Central Pacific atoll. Pacific Sci. 10: 442-480, 4 figs. 1955. Gintuer, A. C. Andrew Garrett’s Fische der Stidsee. Journ. Mus. Godeffroy 7 (15): 217- 256, 20 pls. 1881. Jenkins, O. P. Description of new species of fishes from the Hawaiian Islands belonging to the families of Labridae and Scaridae. Wie Se Fish Comm. Bull. 19: 45-65, 22 figs., 1 pl. 1900. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 3 Jorpan, D.S., and EvErmann, B.W. The aquatic resources of the Hawaiian Islands. Part I. The shore fishes. U. S. Bur. Fish. Bull. 28 (1): xxvili + 574, 229 figs., 65 pls., 73 col. pls. 1905. —— and Swaug, A. The fishes of Samoa. U.S. Bur. Fish. Bull. 25: 175-455 + xxx, 111 figs., 5 pls., 16 col. pls. 1906. and Snyper, J. O. A review of the labroid fishes and related forms found in the waters of Japan. Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 24: 595-662, 10 figs. 1902. Kamonara, T. A list of fishes from the Tokara Islands, Kagoshima Prefecture, Japan. Seto Mar. Biol. Lab. Publ. 3: 265-299, 17 figs. 1954. Quoy, J. R. C., and Gaimarp, P. Voyage autour du monde .. . 1817-20. 1-712, atlas. Paris, 1824. Ranpatu, J. E. Fishes of the Gilbert Islands. Atoll Res. Bull. 47: xi + 248, 2 figs. 1955. _ A revision of the surgeon fish genus Acanthurus. Pacific Sci. 10: 159-235, 23 figs., 3 col. pls. 1956. Recan,C.T. A collection of fishes made by Profes- sor Francisco Fuentes at Easter Island. Proc. Zool. Soc. London 1913: 368-374, 6 pls. Sauvacn, H. E. Description de quelques poissons de la collection du Muséum d’ Histoire Naturelle. Soc. Philom. Paris Bull. (7) 4: 220-228. 1880. Smirn, J. L. B. The fishes of Aldabra. Pt. IV. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (12)'8: 928-957) pls 1 fig. 1955. Tanaka, S. Notes on some Japanese fishes, with descriptions of fourteen new species. Journ. Coll. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo 23: 1-54, 4 pls. 1908. ooo hla COCKROACHES Cockroaches are highly dangerous potential carriers of human disease. This is stressed in a report by Drs. Louis M. Roth and Edwin R. Willis, of the Quartermaster Research and Engi- neering Center, recently issued by the Smithsonian Institution. At least 18 species of cockroaches known to inhabit houses have been incrimi- nated, naturally or experimentally, in trans- mission of infectious agents, or have been claimed to bite man. Several of the commonest species have been captured repeatedly in sewers, cess- pools, and septic tanks and have been found mi- erating from sewers and dumps into nearby build- ings. The predilection of cockroaches for human food is notorious. Thus, the two scientists point out, the mechanism certainly exists for trans- ference of disease organisms to man and domestic animals. Natural transmission has not, however, been incontrovertibly proved. Four strains of polio virus, however, have been found occurring naturally in wild-caught cockroaches. In addition they can harbor, experimentally, Coxsackie, mouse encephalomyelitis, and yellow-fever viruses. About 40 species of disease-causing AND DISEASE bacteria have been isolated from naturally con- taminated cockroaches, and two species of fungi that have been associated with human maladies have been found. “There is no question,” say the Quartermaster Corps scientists, ‘‘about the ability of cock- roaches to carry pathogens in or on their bodies. . . Although they undoubtedly are vectors of the agents of viral and bacterial diseases, with very few exceptions their relations to specific out- breaks of disease have not been determined. This area of research has not received the attention it deserves. Demonstrating correlations between house flies and incidence of intestinal disease has been difficult. Linking cockroaches with the actual transmission of similar disease agents will be no easier. “Cockroaches are tough, resilient insects with amazing endurance and ability to recover rapidly from almost complete extermination. They will probably always be with us, and we can only temporarily reduce their numbers. But, as in all battles, recognition of a common enemy is essential to successful combat.” . v 1) ve. = x f { 1 | 7 r h ¢ ' r j “N * ‘ a } (fie é ‘ 1 * "7 ‘ ‘ so ’ oe Ul 7 “i fh wv i b, 4 ak % ~! w 2 yee Os We, < ’ t S —_ ¥ 2 ‘4 Lah a ra ‘ ¢ fF i a9 i ( , a, F * , : : na tf - £ 4 g-s tagt ne i é CONTENTS History oF Scrence.—Ferdinand Hassler’s gift to America. ELLIoTT B. ROBERTS: oo oe ow eb ee Be ie ZooLoGy.—Antillesia cardisomae, n. gen. and sp. (Copepoda: Harpacti-. coida) from the gill chambers of land crabs, with observations on the related genus Cancrinola. ArTHurR G. HUMES........-.----- ZooLoGy.—Appalachian Cambalidae: Taxonomy and distribution (Diplopoda: Spirostreptida). RicHARD Ll. HorrMaAn.. = .- ape a Hrprtrotocy.—Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, 13: Piedmont herpetofauna on coastal Delmarva. CLYDE IcuTHyoLocy.—Two new species of Anampses from the Hawaiian Islands, with notes on other labrid fishes of this genus. Joun E. PUANDIA LBs ooo one ies ss cues cette ole aS ik ae 2 a Oe ee Page 95 Aste alan ce uate eho ee eae no > 75, 108 ye OLUME 4 April L958 — NUMBER 4 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY (OF SCIENCES | } Published Monthly by the —oe se oH INGTON ACA DEM Y $ O SBS. CRENCES MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD. ~ Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences Editor: CuesteR H. Paas, National Bureau of Standards Associate Editors: RoNALD BaMrorD, University of Maryland Howarp W. Bonp, National Institutes of Health IMMANUEL EsTERMANN, Office of Naval Research This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed- ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond- ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien- tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type- written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and $2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com- plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each. Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored, the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is aliowed against unusual typographical costs. Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author. Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PROCEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JouRNaL.—Per Year...............--.-++-+-+--- $7.50 Price of back numbers and voiumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — _ Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 — 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JoURNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 47, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $393 .50. Monoarapu No. 1, ‘““The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50 INDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS..............-..-+-++--+- $7.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete........... REE ph SS $25.00 Single volames, unbound).45) o) ssa.) 2-22 see ee Eo: - 2.00 Single numbers....... Wale ie. AUG S lt aE PRA eae Ne Se eeeNC Prices on request Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences”’ and agcreseee to the Treasurer, H. S. RappLeyve, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12, Deg. Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md. Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 48 April 1958 No. 4 BIOCHEMISTRY .—The effect of cortisone on the incorporation of C-14 in various tissues from 2-C-14 labeled alanine.! W. C. Hess and I. P. SHAFFRAN, George- town University Schools of Medicine and Dentistry. (Received January 15, 1958) The incorporation of C-14 from 2-14-C labeled DL-alanine in glycogen and protein from liver and skeletal muscle of albino rats following single injections of cortisone acetate was reported by Hess and Shaffran (1, 2). While C-14 was rapidly incorporated into liver glycogen, its release, in control animals, was also rapid. In cortisone acetate treated animals, the specific activity of the liver glycogen increased up to 40 hours and then declined slowly. Cortisone acetate slightly increased the degree of incorpora- tion of C-14 into liver but not muscle protein. These experiments provided no answer to the question whether cortisone was acting by preventing the incorporation of the amino-acid carbon into peripheral tissue protein, hence making it available for glycogen synthesis or whether cortisone was stimulating breakdown of tissue protein. The extra nitrogen excreted in the urine of the cortisone treated rats was sufficient to explain the amount of liver glycogen formed, as was previously found by Long, Katzin, and Fry (3). However, when the nitrogen is considered in terms of muscle tissue, the amount is insufficient to account for the weight loss of the animals. The present experiments were designed to attempt to provide answers to the question whether cortisone acted antianabolically or catabolically. Two series of experiments were planned. In the first, the labeled alanine was fed for several days, to estab- lish the extent of incorporation of C-14 in 1This work was done under a contract with the Atomic Hnergy Commission. tissue protein, lipide, nonprotein nitrogen and glycogen. Then the effect of cortisone on the rate of release of the C-14 was deter- mined. Second, the labeled alanine was fed for three days and cortisone was in- jected at the same time. The first experi- ment would offer evidence on the catabolic effect of cortisone and the second on the anti-anabolic effect. The results suggest that the action of cortisone is primarily catabolic for peripheral protein but not lipide. EXPERIMENTAL Rats, weighing 100 to 150 g, were kept on standard laboratory diet and given 2-C-14 DL-alanine together with 500 mg carrier DL-alanine daily for three days. The total dose of C-14 fed varied between 1.0 and 1.5 X 107 ects./min. In the first series of experiments the control animals were fasted on the fourth and fifth days and then sacrificed. The test animals were given 5 mg of cortisone acetate in the middle of the fasting period, 24 hours be- fore sacrifice. In the second series of ex- periments the fed rats received the same amounts of alanine as in the first series and 5 mg of cortisone acetate for three days and then were sacrificed. The con- trols were similarly treated except they re- ceived no cortisone. The methods for the administration of alanine, determination of liver and muscle glycogen and protein, and their radioac- tivity have been previously described (7, 2). Nonprotein nitrogen was determined in the trichloracetic acid filtrate from the 109 110 precipitation of the protein. The muscle and liver proteins were exhaustively extracted with alcohol and ether to obtain the total lipide fractions. The separation of the carcass into the nonprotein nitrogen, lipide, and defatted residue was done by the method of Clark (4). RESULTS Table 1 contains the basic analytical data on body and liver weights, lipide, and elycogen content from both series of ex- periments. The values in all cases repre- sent the average from experiments on six to eight animals. Table 2 contains all the results of the nitrogen determinations on the tissues, the nonprotein nitrogen frac- tions, and the urine. The values are ex- pressed as mg N per 100 g final body weight for the liver protein and NPN, as TaBLE 1.—Bopy WEIGHT, LIPIDE, AND - GLYCOGEN VALUES Expt. 1 Expt. 2 Cortisone Cortisone last 24 hours | continuous Bue Test Cor Test Wail Vitis Hoscasoceccooes oy GY ED iloz IMMA Win Bocaaeeeseseses alley (AY Guile kee: IUIRVGI® Wiis Wewosseccaeaescos| Boo) Boa Ooo Ooo Inver wt.) 2/100) "2. body Wu crane ep res ateee: aes PAS Bio) Bees|, eed) Liver lipide percent...-.:.| 4.0) 4.3) 5.5) 6.3 Muscle lipide percent..... RS) BAN BS) Be Cancassy lipiGereeaec s.r Wa eA EG 2a Liver glycogen percent....| 0.1) 1.5) 6.4) 8.2 Muscle glycogen percent..| 0.6) 0.7; 0.8} 1.1 TABLE 2.—TissuE NITROGEN VALUES JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Expt. 1 Expt. 2 Cortisone Cortisone last 24 hrs. continuous Control | Test |Control| Test iver proves epee: Oy POO piles} AK) Carcass aN mgs 1700 |1620 |1880 {1740 Muscle protein per- COI ae eee eee Oro Bie ll 3.4 2.9 Trivers Nie Neh oe BATS PATO 2 4 eZ Tae Carcass NPN, N mg..| 112 99 | 149 | 116.6 Muscle NPN, mg. 3/2 MUS Clete eee A ior 2| a aoe Wiines mga eee. cee 530 602 430 548 * mg. N/100 g. body weight. VOL. 48, No. 4 percent for the muscle protein and mg/g muscle for the muscle NPN. Table 3 con- tains the data on the estimation of the radioactivity due to the incorporation of the C-14 from the administered labeled alanine in the nitrogen containing fractions. All the values are calculated in counts per minute per mg nitrogen. In Table 4 the C-14 content of the total lipide fractions are presented calculated as counts per minute per mg lipide. DISCUSSION In experiment 1, designed to test whether cortisone acetate acted catabolically, the control animals showed substantial ac- cumulation of C-14 activity in both liver and muscle protein, and also in the total carcass. The several lipide fractions like- wise showed incorporation of C-14. When cortisone acetate was administered for the last 24 hours the liver protein showed an increase not only in total protein but also in C-14 incorporation, the activity per mg protein nitrogen rising from 144 to 162 counts per minute. The activity in the NPN fractions of the liver increased while that of both carcass and muscle decreased. The activity of the muscle protein de- creased as well as the protein nitrogen content. It is apparent that as far as muscle and total carcass protein is concerned cortisone acts catabolically. As far as liver protein is concerned this is not the case nor does it hold for lipide. All the lipide fractions were higher in absolute amounts and slightly higher in specific activity. Experiment 2, in which cortisone was administered simultaneously with the la- beled alanine, indicated that the specific activity and nitrogen content of the muscle protein was less than that of the controls. In the 3-day period the specific activity of the muscle protein decreased 37 percent and of the carcass protein 32 percent. In the first experiment in which cortisone was administered after the labeled carbon had been laid down in the tissue, and the corti- sone given for only the last 24 hours of a 5-day period, the decreases in specific activity of the muscle and carcass protein were 30 and 26 percent, respectively. It Aprit 1958 HESS AND SHAFFRAN: TABLE 3.—CaRBON-|I4 Activity IN TISSUE AND URINE, CountTs/MIN./Me. N. Expt. 1 Expt. 2 Cortisone Cortisone last 24 hrs. continuous Control | Test | Control| Test ever provein......... EAS G2 59a els Muscle protein....... 80 56); 104 65 Gameasss 956. ees 58 43 76 52 ILiINzere INUEAN eee 93 ay (2, 126 Mirsele INIPIN =. ....... 5 3 18 12 @arcass NIRIN. oo... e. 8 6 16 il UTA). se eee 1132 | 1010 | 1200 840 Taste 4.—Carpon-l4 Acriviry 1n Lipipes, CountTs/MIN./MG. LIpPIDE Expt. 1 Expt. 2 Cortisone Cortisone last 24 hrs. continous Control| Test |Control| Test imeem ae S15 | 35.5 | 44.5 | OO IMOTSCIG. 5a 2) ener W5o3) | ALI PS | BO 8 Cancaicsmerreee....4.| 12.4 |-14.4 | 18.0+| 2620 would appear that experiment 2 does not give an unequivocal answer to the question whether the cortisone acts solely cata- bolically or antianabolically. There was some reduction in specific activity of muscle and carcass protein, but this was probably due to the fact that the dominant catabolic effect was being exerted on the labeled carbon as soon as it was incorporated. In both experiments the specific activity of the liver protein was increased and likewise that of the liver and tissue lipides. The specific activity of the NPN of the liver increased whereas that of the muscle and carcass decreased. Clark (4) observed an increase in the NPN fraction of the liver and a decrease in the carcass NPN follow- ing cortisone and Ingle et al. (5) found that it induced a significant increase in the concentration of plasma amino acids. Clark also found a decrease in carcass nitrogen following cortisone. In both experiments reported here there was a decrease in carcass nitrogen and an increase in urine nitrogen in the test animals. An increase in lipide content of liver, muscle, and carcass produced by cortisone acetate was noted in both experiments. EFFECT OF CORTISONE 111 This occurred despite the fact that in both experiments there was a loss of weight in the test animals. The increase in liver lipide has been noted by others, Silber and Rorters(G) pC astlaneteals <7,)sand, S, I. Einhorn et al. (8). The decrease in weight is probably due to loss of water as was suggested by Cavallero et al. (9) and Hedon (10). Kyle et al. (17) found that hydro- cortisone administered to patients produced a significant increase of total body fat as determined by specific gravity measure- ments. The loss in tissue protein as in- dicated by urine nitrogen increase is insuffi- cient to account for the loss in weight, an observation also made by Clark (4). The concept that the action of cortisone is catabolic is supported by the recent work of Grossman et al. (12). These investigators gave I-131 labeled serum albumin to pa- tients and measured the effects of hydro- cortisone on turnover. They found it in- creased the breakdown of the albumin but that anabolic effects were unchanged or only slightly decreased. Fritz (13) fed N-15 glycine to rats and found that cortisone enhanced protein catabolism and suggested that it induced a protein mobilization from the periphery to the liver at a rate faster than the liver could catabolize it. Cortisone increased the liver glycogen in both series of experiments. In series one where the 24-hour fast prior to the ad- ministration of the glycogen depleted the liver glycogen, cortisone produced a large increase in glycogen. In series two where the animals were fed continuously, the cortisone produced an increase of almost 30 percent in liver glycogen even though the control livers contained 6.4 percent glycogen. Slight increases in muscle gly- cogen were also found in both series of experiments. SUMMARY The effect of the administration of corti- sone acetate on the incorporation of C-14 from 2-C-14 labeled alanine into tissue pro- tein and lipide was investigated. Two series of experiments with rats were run. In the first series the animals were given the labeled alanine for three days to permit incorporation of the tag into tissue. They 112 were then fasted for 24 hours to deplete liver glycogen, given 5 mg of cortisone acetate and sacrificed after an additional 14-hour fast. The control animals accumu- lated the tagged carbon into muscle, liver, and carcass protein and lipide. The corti- sone acetate treated animals showed an increase in liver protein, lipide, and gly- cogen content and also increased specific activity. Muscle and carcass protein and specific activity were markedly decreased. Muscle and carcass lipide was increased and specific activity was slightly increased. In the second series the labeled alanine and cortisone acetate were given simul- taneously to the animals for three days. The specific activity and total amount of liver protein and lipide were increased. The muscle and carcass proteim was re- duced in amount and the specific activity was likewise decreased. Muscle and carcass lipide was increased and then specific ac- tivity was increased. The first experiments indicate that as far as muscle and carcass protein is con- cerned, the action of cortisone acetate 1s catabolic, and anabolic for liver protein, muscle, liver, and carcass lipide. The second experiment indicates that cortisone acetate did not prevent the accumulation of C-14 in muscle and carcass protein but JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 48, No. 4 it did reduce the amount, and it also re- duced the amount of protein formed. This could be interpreted as non-interference with anabolism but the immediate exertion of a catabolic effect on both the newly formed and existing protein. LITERATURE CITED (1) Hess, W. C., and Suarrran, I. P. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 46: 20. 1956. Q) Ss. lbidk 47) aes (3) Lone, C: N. H., Katzin, Bland pie, Ki. Endocrin. 26: 309. 1951. (4) Cuark, I. Journ. Biol. Chem. 200: 69. 1953. (5) IneuE, D.J., Prestrup, M. C., and Nezamis, J. E.. Proc: Soc. Exp. Biolwandi Med: 75: 801. 1950. (6) Suser, R..H., and PRorrery ¢: Cin docrin. 52: 518. 1955. (7) Sata, G., Benevi, O., AmERa, A., CIcERr, C., and CavaLuero, C. Sperimentale 101: 195. 1951. (8) Ernnorn, E., Hrrscuperc, E., and GELHORN, A. Journ. Gen. Physiol. 37: 559. 1954. (9) CavaLLERo, C., Sava, G., and Ba.uasio, C. B. Boll. Atti Soc. Ital. Endocrinol. 2: 99. 1952. (10) Hepon, L., Macasrizs, J., and MaRtTIN, L. J. Physiol. (Paris) 47; 190%) 1950: (11) Kytz, L. H., Meyer, R. J., Scwaar, M., and WERDEIN, E. J. Journ. Clin. Invest. 35: 1045. 1956. (12) Grossman, J., Yatow, A. A., and WESTON, R. E. Abs. 49th Annual Meeting of the Amer. Soc. for Clin. Invest., p. 82. 1957. (13) Fritz, I. Endoerin. 58: 485. 1956. As I grow old I grow calm. If I feel what are perhaps an old man’s apprehensions, I do not lose my hopes. I do not pin my dreams for the future to my country or even to my race. I think it probable that cwilization somehow will last as long as I care to look ahead—perhaps with smaller numbers, but also bred to greatness and splendor by science. I think it is not improbable that man, like the grub that prepares a chamber for the winged thing it has never seen, but 1s to be—that man may have cosmic destinies that he does not understand. And so beyond the vision of battling races and an um- poverished earth I catch a dreaming glimpse of peace. Perpetual inspiration vs as neces- sary to the life of goodness, holiness, and happiness as perpetual respiration is necessary to animal life-—WiLi1am Law Aprit 1958 NICOL: TAXONOMY VERSUS STRATIGRAPHY 115 GEOLOGY .— Taxonomy versus stratigraphy. Daviy Nico, Southern Illinois Uni- versity, Carbondale, Il. (Received January 6, 1958) Nomenclatural designations should serve to clarify, not obscure, taxonomic relation- ships, and the practical needs of stratig- raphers should in no way hinder this goal. The application of formal nomenclature to every variant in a fossil population is a common practice among stratigraphers, who seek to name each form which has stratigraphic significance; but this practice confounds the true purpose of taxonomy. The problem is well stated by Newell and by Kermack in the symposium on The species concept in palaeontology. Newell (p. 66) says: Morphologic forms artificially extracted from whole populations (e.g., polymorphs, ontogenetic stages, ecotypes, and individual variants) often are given formal Latin names as varieties or species. This action is defended on the grounds that all distinctive fossil forms are actually or potentially indices of stratigraphic horizon, hence deserving of separate recognition. As far as it goes there is some logic in this argument but the point of view on which it is based actually defeats one of the ultimate objectives in stratigraphy, which is the establishment of detailed, interregional fossil zones based on evolutionary development. And on page 73 Newell reiterates: It hardly seems appropriate to burden in- ternational nomenclature with binominal or trinominal Latin names for categories which at best have only local stratigraphic value and are devoid of evolutionary significance. Yet palaeon- tologists who favour the naming of artificial categories of scope less than whole populations unconsciously support the limited objectives of local and temporary advantage over the long term goal of world-wide stratigraphic zonation based on evolutionary succession. The individual variants might better be designated, if necessary, by non- Linnaean, vernacular names or numbers. And Kermack states succinctly (p. 101): “Palaeontology in general suffers from too many species rather than too few.” In general, problems of this sort arise When one is dealing with species which have wide geographic and _ stratigraphic ranges and have numerous individuals. The Newell and Kermack contentions are well exemplified and supported by con- sideration of the species Glycymeris ameri- cana, which is found from Virginia to Florida from the late Miocene to the Re- cent. During the latest Miocene this species was exceedingly numerous and _ variable. The most striking variant is what I have termed the mutant rugose (Nicol, 1953, p. 451). The rugose form was given a species name by Conrad, quinquerugata; but Dall (1898, p. 610) and Gardner (1943, pp. 27- 28) have synonymized quinquerugata with americana. Dall (p. 611) thought that the rugose form was due to some pathologic cause. The earliest specimens of Glycymeris americana do not have rugae or folds on the posterior side of the shell, but toward the end of the late Miocene rugose forms began to appear in populations along with normal forms. There is no other consistent difference between normal and _ rugose forms except for one or more folds or rugae which are located on the outside of the shell and which are nearly always on the posterior side. (Apparently further muta- tions of some of the rugose mutants gave rise to the rare species Glycymeris aberrans at the very end of the Miocene, but this species is of no concern in the present dis- cussion.) Rugose mutants became more and more abundant and spread to popula- tions covering practically the entire geo- graphic range of Glycymeris americana until the end of the Miocene, and then they suddenly disappeared. Specimens of Gly- cymeris americana trom Phocene and vounger strata never have folds or rugae. There appear to be no geographic or eco- logic differences between normal and rugose forms. Collections from late Miocene strata contain both forms in various percentages. There is no doubt that the rugose forms have stratigraphic significance, certainly more so than the normal forms of Gily- cymeris americana. However, the problem is how to designate the rugose mutant. The 114 average stratigrapher would prefer a formal Latin name, which, preferably, would have some official nomenclatural standing. From the purely biologic or strict taxonomic view this is unfortunate. I agree with Dall and Gardner that there is no reason to consider the rugose variant as a distinct species. Furthermore, this mutant cannot be con- sidered a subspecies by definition. One could refer to the rugose forms as Gly- cymeris americana variety quinquerugata, but I object to this solution for two reasons: (1) There is always the possibility that some paleontologist will unwittingly raise the varietal name to that of a subspecies or a species without at least stating his reasons for doing so. (2) The term or category “variety” is a sort of catchall and really tells us nothing about the variant. My preference, as I stated in 1953, is to term the form Glycymeris americana, rugose mutant. If one would prefer in this case, the term “polymorph” can be used instead of “mutant”, for Glycymeris americana is JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 4 certainly a polymorphic species. (Recom- mended procedure for the term or terms following the species or subspecies name is to set off the description with a comma. However, this is, as yet, not followed by many taxonomists.) Either phrase—“‘Tu- gose mutant” or “‘rugose polymorph’’—has the advantage of expressing the biologic relationship of the rugose form to the normal form. In this way the stratigraphers can keep the integrity of the variant with- out confounding its true taxonomic position. LITERATURE CITED Dati, W. H. Contributions to the Tertiary fauna of Florida, etc. Trans. Wagner Free Inst. Sci. Philadelphia 3 (4): 521-947, pls. 23-35. 1898. GARDNER, JuLIA. Mollusca from the Miocene and Lower Pliocene of Virginia and North Carolina, Part I. Pelecypoda. U. 8. Geol. Survey Prof. Pap. 199-A: 178, 23 pls. 1943. Nicot, D. A _ study of the polymorphic species Glycymeris americana. Journ. Pal. 27 (3): 451-455. 1953. SyLVESTER-BRADLEY, P. C. (editor). The species concept in palaeontology. Systematics Assoc. Publ. 2: 145. London, 1956. Truth is the foundation and the reason of the perfection of beauty, for what- ever stature a thing may be, it cannot be beautiful and perfect, unless it be truly what it should be, and possess truly all that it should have-—A.L¥FRED NoRTH WHITEHEAD. Aprit 1958 KENG: TWO NEW GENERA OF GRASSES FROM CHINA ES BOTANY .—Two new genera of grasses from China. Y. L. Kena, Department of Biology, Nanking University, and Chung Shan Memorial Nanking Botanical Garden, Botanical Institute, Academia Sinica. (Communicated by Agnes Chase. ) (Received December 7, 1957) During the past few years the author and his collaborators have devoted them- selves to writing in Chinese an illustrated flora of the grasses of China. Although they have intended to include in this work only the more familiar species, there are about 200 genera and 800 species described and figured in it. Among the ample material gathered from the different parts of the country, a good many novelties have been encountered in the course of their study. Two new genera are here presented for pub- lication. Sinochasea! Keng, genus novum _ tribus Agrostidearum, cum Deyeuxia Clarioni et Calamagrostide Adansoni comparandum; ab illa rhachillae continuatione minuta plerumque glabra haud penicillata, lemmate sub _ lobos omnino villoso, ab hae lemmatis callo breviter barbato, arista inter lobos valida, geniculata, et ab utraque glumis saepe 5- (vel inferiore 6-, superiore 4-) haud 1-3-nervibus, stigmatibus tribus distinguendum. Spiculae uniflorae, in paniculam contractam dispositae, lateraliter leviter compressae, rhachilla supra glumas facile disarticulata, in acumen minutum glabrum supra paleam producta; glumae subaequales vel prima_ saepius longior, herbaceae, plerumque prominenter quinque- nerves, dorso carinatae vel basin versus rotundatae, marginibus anguste hyalinis; lemma glumis brevior, lateraliter compressum vel inferne dorso rotundatum, a latere videtur anguste oblongum, profunde bilobum, aequaliter villosum, chartaceum vel inferne subcoriaceum, sed lobis glabris, Superne membranaceis, quinquenerve, nervo medio valido, elevato, sed basin versus tenui, e sinu aristam geniculatam exserente, nervis lateralibus inferne obscuris, superne per lobos paralleliter percurrentibus, marginibus inter se imminentibus, paleam omnino occultanti- bus, callo minuto, rotundato-obtuso, breviter 1 Name from a combination of Szno-, China, and Chasea, after Mrs. Agnes Chase, well-known agrostologist of the United States, who gave much help to the study of Chinese grasses. densiusque barbato; palea a dorso visa anguste lanceolata, bidentata, lemmate brevior tenui- orque, obscure binervis, inter nervos (carinas) adpresse villosa et superne subhyalina, mar- ginibus inflexis, approximatis vel remotis (i.e. haud inter se imminentibus); lodiculae duae, semi-ovatae, hyalinae; stamina tria; filamenta elongata; antherae oblongae; ovarium fusiforme vel lineare, glabrum; styli tres, terminales, brevissimi stigmatibus dense plumosis; caryopsis (immatura) a lemmate paleaque libera. Gramen perenne, caespitosum; culmi validi, simplices, paucinodosi; foliorum laminae lineares, involutae; panicula terminalis, erecta vel leviter arcuata. Species adhuc cognita unica, in provincia Tsinghai, Chinae occidentalis, endemica. Sinochasea trigyna Keng, sp. nov. (Fig. 1). Perennis glabra, basi cum vaginis vetustis brunneis et innovationibus intravaginalibus cir- cumdata, radicibus fibrosis validis, cire. 0.8 mm. crassis, e rhizomate duro brevi ortis; culmi erecti, rigidi, teretes, circ. 45 em alti, 1.5 mm in diametro 2-3-nodosi, nodo supremo sub medium usque ad 2/3 superiorem sito; folia pallide viridula, erecta, caulina duo vel tria; vaginae arctae, striatae, scabridulae, internodio 11—18.5 em longo multo breviores; ligula membranacea vel _ firmula, truncata vel lacerata, 0.5-1 mm longa, in mar- gines vaginae decurrens; laminae e basi angustata anguste lineares, rigidae, valide nervosae, sub- ulato-involutae, 6.5-8.5 in innovatione usque ad 16 cm longae, expansae 1-2 raro 3 mm latae, suprema saepe valde abbreviata, setiformi, 1-2 em longa, utrinque ut in marginibus scabrae vel ad paginam superiorem setuloso-asperae; panicula spiciformis, anguste lanceolata, 7-8.5 em longa, circ. 1 em lata, continua vel inferne interrupta, ramis binis, adpressis, primariis usque ad 3 em longis, inferne plus minusve nudis, superne divisis et 4-7-spiculatis; pedicelli sicut rami setuloso- seabriduli, adpressi, laterales 0.6-1.5 terminales 3-5 mm longi; spiculae anguste lanceolatae, 10-12 mm longae, confertae, pallide viridulae vel purpurascentes, demum hiantes; glumae spiculam aequantes vel subaequantes, acuminatae, Fic. 1.—Sinochasea trigyna Keng: 1, Habit; 2, spikelet; 3, first and second glumes; 4, side view of lemma; dorsal 5, view of the same; 6, ventral view of the lower part of lemma showing the prolonged rachilla; 7, dorsal view of palea; 8, lodicules, stamens, and pistil. (Type.) 116 Aprin 1958 prima saepius quam secunda 0.5-1 mm longiore, distincte quinquenerves vel prima inferne 6-, secunda 4-nervis sublaeves vel minutissime scaberulae, saepe apicem versus recurvatae; lemma 7-8 mm longum, pilis albis cire. 2 mm longis villosum, lobis acuminatis, circ. 3 mm longis, callo pilis densis 0.5-0.75 mm _longis barbato; arista scaberula, in 1/3 inferiore parte geniculata, columna laxius contorta, 3-3.5 mm, subula 7-8.5 mm longa; rhachillae processus 0.5-1 mm longus, laevis, glaber vel raro pilis 1-3 sparse pilosus; palea 6 mm longa, 0.75 mm lata (mar- ginibus inflexis excl.), dentibus acuminatis, vix 1 mm longis, nervis (carinis) sub dentes minute ciliolatis; lodiculae anguste semiovatae, cire. 1.5 mm longae, inferne firmulae, glabrae, acuminatae vel altera saepe breviter cuspidata; antherae flavo-brunneae, 1 mm longae; ovarium purpureo-nigrescens, circ. 2 mm longum, ven- traliter canaliculatum; stigmata flavo-brunnea, 2-3 mm longa; caryopsis immatura. CuiNnA: Prov. Tsinghai, Hai-yen Hsien, San Chio Shen, Sheep-breeding Station, San Tui Tui Pu, 21 VIII 1954, P. C. Yeh & W.C. Wang, etc. 3241 (type in Herbarium of the Department of Biology, Nanking University; duplicate types in Herb. Botanical Institute, Peking, and Chung Shan Memorial Nanking Botanical Garden, Nanking). This species is peculiar in the tribe in having three stigmas. The spikelets are probably cleis- togamous, the short oblong anthers in the mature florets often being entangled with the hairs of the stigmas which, after removal of the lemma, are seen partly exposed laterally on the outside of the inflexed margins of the palea. This genus appears to be comparable with the two closely related genera Deyeuxia and Calama- grostis, the former being regarded by some authors as a section of the latter. It is allied to Deyeuxia through D. moupinensis (¥ranch.) Pilger, since that species, though differing in having callus- hairs equaling the lemma, has also a geniculate awn arising from the sinus of a deeply bilobed lemma. It is also similar to such species of Calamagrostis as C. Munroana Boiss. and C. Griffithiana Hook. f., in which the lemma is villous all over and the callus hairs shorter than the lemma. Anisachne? Keng, genus novum tribus Agro- 2 Name from Greek anisos, unequal, and achne, scale, referring to the unequal and successively greater length of the first glume, second glume, and lemma. KENG: TWO NEW GENERA OF GRASSES FROM CHINA 117 stidearum, Deyeuxiae Clarioni, arcte affine lem- mate glumis longiore, gluma inferiore quam superiore plerumque breviore differt. Spiculae uniflorae, lateraliter compressae, in paniculam dispositae, rhachilla supra glumas dis- articulata, in setam minutam villosam supra paleam producta; glumae subaequales vel prima quam secunda saepius leviter brevior, uninerves vel secunda inferne trinerves, viridi-carinatae, albo-marginatae; anthoecium hermaphroditum, ad anthesin hians; lemma glumis saepe longius, tenuiter chartaceum vel membranaceum, superne obscure quinquenerve carinatumque, inferne dorso rotundatum, muticum vel sub apicem mucronatum, callo minuto dense barbato excepto glabrum; palea lemmate brevior tenuiorque, ab eo laxe inclusa vel ad maturitatem dorso ex- posita, bicarinata; lodiculae duae, hyalinae; stamina tria; filamenta demum elongata; an- therae oblongae; ovarium obovatum, glabrum; styli duo, terminales, brevissimi; stigmata sparse plumosa, lateraliter exserta; caryopsis ellipsoidea, dorso rotundata, facie leviter sulcata, inter lemma paleamque inclusa, libera; hilum subbasale, breviter lineare; embryo parvus. Gramen perenne, caespitosum; culmi graciles vel gracillimi, simplices, plurinodosi; foliorum laminae lineares, planae vel involutae; panicula terminalis, angusta vel ad maturitatem aperta. Species adhue cognita unica, Chinam austro- occidentalem inhabitat. Anisachne gracilis Keng, sp. nov. (Fig. 2). Perennis glabra, radicibus filiformibus ex rhizomate duro brevi ortis, innovationibus extra- vaginalibus, tenuibus, erectis vel saepius decum- bentibus; culmi erecti vel saepe geniculati, basi vaginis marcidis fibrosis albo-brunneis obtecti, 25-40 em alti, 0.5-1 mm in diametro, lenes, 3-4- nodosi, nodo supremo infra vel in juventate supra medium sito; vaginae striatae, laeves, basin versus clausae, internodio 3-7.5 em _ longo breviores, vel inferiores eo 12-20 mm longo leviter longiores, suprema 6-11 em longa, quam sua lamina longiore; ligula seariosa, truncata vel obtusa, 0.5-1 vel usque ad 2 mm longa, in mar- gines membranaceas decurrens; laminae ubique aequilata vel basi vix contracta, lineares, fusco- viridulae, firmulae, planae vel siccitate involutae. utrinque seaberulae, caulinae superiores breviores, 2.5-8.5 em longae, 0.8-1.5 mm latae; panicula 7-16 em longa, exserta vel basi in juventate vagina suprema inclusa, ramis filiformibus vel 9 subeapillaribus, scaberulis, 2—3-nis, longe remotis, 118 BEE 95 7- td ‘ ea: Fic. 2.—Anisachne gracilis Keng: 1, Habit; 2, spikelet; 3, side view of lemma with prolonged rachilla; 4, dorsal view of palea with prolonged rachilla; 5, lodicules, stamens, and pistil; 6, dorsal and ventral views of caryopsis. (1-5 from type, 6 from Wang Chi-wu 83229.) JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 4 erectis vel basalibus ad maturitatem adscendenti- patentibus, primariis 3.5-8 cm longis, inferne longe nudis, superne supra vel infra medium di-— trichotomis; pedicelli laterales 0.5-2 mm _ ter- minales usque ultra 3 mm longi, scaberuli, apice incrassati; spiculae circ. 3 mm longae, demum hiantes; glumae acutae vel secunda obtusiuscula, pallide viridulae, margine albo-vel purpureomem- branaceae, ad maturitatem stramineae, prima l-nervis, 2-2.5 mm longa, secunda 1-3-nervis, 2.5-2.8 mm longa, ad carinam scaberulae; lemma spiculam aequans, acutum vel sub apicem saepius mucrone 0.2 mm longo praeditum, callo pilis circ. 1 mm longis dense barbato; rhachillae con- tinuatio penicillata, 0.8-0.5 mm longa, conjuncte cum pilis villosis lemmatis dimidium aequans; palea glabra cum lateribus inflexis anguste lanceolata, 2 mm longa, ad carimas sublaevis vel sparse minutissime scaberula; lodiculae semi- ovatae vel inferne trilobatae, 0.8 mm longae, elabrae; antherae fulvae, 1 mm longae; caryopsis obesa, flavo-brunnea, 1.25 mm longa. Cuina: Prov. Kweichow, Pichieh Hsien, on acid sandy soil, altitude 1,400 meters, June 1, 1943, Hou Hsueh-yuh no. 2148 (type in the herbarium, Department of Biology, Nanking University, Nanking, China). Prov. Yunnan, E. E. Maire 6895, 6898 in part; Likiang Snow Range, J. F. Rock 10693; Wei-hsi, 1955, Hu Yung-kang without number; Mengtze, 1939-40, Wang Chi-wu 83229; Dali, en route from Tsang Shan Miao to Chung Ho Sze, October 2, 1946, Liou Tchen-ngo 21012, in part. In the author’s manuscript on the Grasses of China [unpublished] this species was misidentified as Deyeuxia abnormis Hook. f., which is, accord- ing to the original description given in the Flora of British India, neither a Deyeuxia nor an Agrostis. It seems that this Indian species may need to have another generic name, just as in the same Flora the next species Deyeuxia treutleri (Kuntze) Stapf did; the latter has been made the type of the genus Aulacolepis Hackel. The new genus here described, as noted in the Latin diagnosis, appears to be related to Deyeuxia Clarion through the presence of a villous pro- longed rachilla and a shortly bearded callus. If its glumes were longer than the lemma, it would un- doubtedly be referred to the genus Deyeuxia, and the species would be included in the same series with awnless lemmas as is Deyeuxia diffusa Keng, from Yunnan, China. Aprit 1958 STASEK: NEW SPECIES OF ALLOGAUSSIA 119 ZOOLOGY .—A new species of Allogaussia (Amphipoda, Lysianassidae) found living within the gastrovascular cavity of the sea-anemone Anthopleura elegantissima. CHARLES R. Srasex, University of California, Berkeley. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) (Received October 8, 1957) In the spring of 1955, while on a field trip to Moss Beach, San Mateo County, Cali- fornia, a group of zoology students from the University of California discovered that by squeezing individuals of the aggregating anemone Anthopleura elegantissima they were able to obtain from the gastrovascular tract small pinkish gammarid amphipods which were obviously alive and apparently uninjured by the nematocysts and digestive enzymes to which they were exposed. How- ard Law, one of the discoverers, presented in a brief unpublished paper (Law, 1955) a preliminary description of the body and of various appendages, but he was unable to correlate with certainty the characters he found with those of any gammarid family. Nevertheless he tentatively placed it within the Lysianassidae on the grounds that it resembled this family more closely than it did any other. The present study is the result of an attempt to identify this unusual amphipod. The amphipods described below were, for the most part, collected from anemones during the latter part of December 1955 and January 1956 and were stored in 70 percent alcohol. All came from the same location; namely, the “Sand Rocks” at Moss Beach. The location name is taken from the map of Moss Beach in Light et al. (1954). METHODS AND MATERIALS To assure that all spines and setae would be visible, the following method was em- ployed in preparation of specimens for dissection. The specimens were first placed in a solution of 70 percent alcohol and fast green and left over night. They were then taken through a series of increasing alcohol concentrations (70-90-95-100 percent) to clove oil, in which they were allowed to clear and harden. The brittleness given to the specimens by the clove oil proved a great aid in dissections as the appendages could be separated from the body without tearing. The stained and dissected amphi- pods were mounted in clove oil under a cover glass and observed with a compound microscope. Approximately 30 individuals were treated in this way. The figures were drawn with the aid of a camera lucida. DESCRIPTION OF THE GENUS A review of the literature has revealed that there are no less than 110 genera in the Lysianassidae, the family to which the present species belongs. Of these, 48 are described in Stebbing’s monograph (1906). The genus Allogaussia Schellenberg (1926) as modified by K. H. Barnard (1932) seems to include the present species with two further points of expansion necessitated by the inclusion of the amphipod described below. In the following translation of the original description of the genus by Schellen- berg, Barnard’s addenda are given in parentheses. Expanded characters applying only to the present species are included in the description. Description.—Body broad. Coxae long. (Side- plate 4 may or may not fit into a groove on side-plate 5.) Third epimeral plate not produced to a tooth. Telson short and rounded or sinuous (or long and notched or shallowly or deeply cleft). Antennae of nearly equal length (stout in both sexes); second joint of peduncle of antenna I relatively long, (or very short compared with its breadth, with third joint easily visible dor- sally, ventrally entirely masked on inner side by first joint of flagellum). (First flagellar joint stout and elongate, first joint of accessory flagellum also elongate.) Flagellum of antenna II in the male not long. Epistome arched forward over the upper ip, Qvith a narrow notch separating it from the upper lip). Cutting edge of the man dible simple with a subterminal “‘canine tooth.” Molar of moderate size, channeled. Palp arising behind the molar; first joint short, second joint longer than the third. Inner lobe of maxilla | 120 with two terminal setae. Inner lobe of maxilla I somewhat shorter and more slender than the outer lobe, both lobes slender. Maxillipeds well developed. Gnathopod I powertul, subchelate or slightly chelate as in the species described below (Fig. 3, J). Metacarpus longer than the carpus. Gnathopod II chelate. Peraeopods 5-7 short. Base of peraeopod 5 peculiarly broadened or not ‘neculiarly” broadened as in the present species (Fig. 3, R). Base of peraeopod 7 broad. Uropod II considerably surpasses the shorter ones; also, in the nonsetose uropod III of the male the inner ramus is shorter than the 2-jointed outer ramus, (or uropod III is shghtly longer with setae on both rami). Near Orchomenella. Since no type species has been assigned Allogaussia, I wish to designate A. paradova Schellenberg as such. Schellenberg gives three species of Allo- gaussia; Barnard adds two others. Of the five named species, not one corresponds completely to the one discovered at Moss Beach; therefore, the following name and description are proposed for the new species. DESCRIPTION OF Allogaussia recondita, n. sp. Allogaussia recondita, n. sp. (Fig. iD) Saelebe specific name comes from the Latin, reconditus = hidden, and refers to the distinctive microhabitat in which this species is found. Diagnosis.—Allogaussia recondita 1s distin- ouished from all previously described members of the genus by the following characters: The slightly chelate gnathopod I, the relatively weak broadening of the base of peraeopod 5; the shal- jow excavation in the posterior margin of the second joint of peraeopod 7; the produced apex of the typical female telson; the extremely deep emargination of the medial edge of the third joint of antenna I in the male; the distal acces- sory branchia on peraeopod 4; and by the com- bination of a setose uropod III (in the male) and the absence of a groove on side-plate 5 into which side-plate 4 fits. The association with